Mitsubishi MOTORS GALANT 1989 Service Manual Download Page 1

Page: 1 / 934

FOREWORD

BACKUP DSM manual to be used ONLY as a BACKUP. Please DO NOT REDISTRIBUTE

WHOLE SECTIONS.

BACKUP was sold to

under the fact that

OWN

a GENUINE DSM MANUAL. It CANNOT BE considered a REPLACEMENT (Unless your original
manual was lost or destroyed.)

See

for

Thank you.

WE SUPPORT

VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH

M o t o r s

r e s e r v e s t h e

t o m a k e c h a n g e s

or to make

to or Improvements

p r o d u c t s

a n y

u p o n

t h e m o n

p r o d u c t s

m a n u f a c t u r e d

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

INDEX

Summary of Contents for GALANT 1989

Page 1: ...com WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH AMITSUBISHI PlOlDRSALESOFAMERlCAIllC Mltsubishl M o t o r s Corporation reserves the right t o m a k e c h a n g e s in design or to make addltlons to or Improvements In Its products wlthout lmposmg a n y obllgatlons u p o n Itself to mstall t h e m o n Its p r o d u c t s previously m a n u f a c t u r e d 0 1992 Mitsubishi Motors Corporat...

Page 2: ...e compartment cm a 13A0218 Name Dedicated fuse block Symbol B Fusible link box main fusible links and sub NOTE I For details of fusible link and fuse refer to P 12 2 rhdee Name column is arranged in alphabetical Up to 1990 models vehicles with ABS From 1990 5 models B q i TSB Revision ...

Page 3: ...peed detection connector DOHC C Oxgen sensor check connector DOHC D Fuel pump check connector A Data link connector E Ignition timing adjustment connector NOTE B I 1 From 1990 models 2 The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order Engine comuartment I I Interior Oxgen sensor check connector 13A0218 ...

Page 4: ...4 GENERAL Grounding Location GROUNDING LOCATION Engine compartment c TSB Revision ...

Page 5: ...e Grounding Location 5 Anterior 1340218 MFI control unit WA0535 DOHC FM D ...

Page 6: ...6 GENERAL Grounding Location From 1990 models Luggage compartment DOHC MD DOHC 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 7: ... circuit B 1 Diode ACTIVE ESC circuit I c Diode auto cruise control circuit up to 1990 models A Diode sunroof circuit From 199 1 models C Diode AJT fluid temperature warning light circuit AWD AR NOTE L Diode theft alarm system circuit A AC The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order Interior From 1991 models Up to 1990 models TSB Revision ...

Page 8: ...BLOCK MlWG Up t o 1990 models I T I t I t Vote 1 The alphabetical symbols used for connectors correspond to the alphabetical symbols for connectors on next page 2 The indicates the connection terminal at the harness side TSB Revision I ...

Page 9: ...GENERAL Junction Block To front harness No connection To roof harness To instrument panel harness Heater relay Fuse block Multipurpose fuse c II I I I I 16A6661 16A0002 To body harness TSB Revision ...

Page 10: ...91 models r i I I f 0 5 U J Kx35 AC w1701 I NOTE 1 The alphabetical symbols used for connectors correspond to the alphabetical symbols for connectors on next page 2 The indicates the connection terminal at the harness side TSB Revision ...

Page 11: ...GENERAL Junction Block 71 No connection 1 Front side 1 To roof harness To front harness To instrument panel harness TSB Revision I WA1236 Fuse block Multipurpose fuse 1 Reverse side 1 To body harness ...

Page 12: ...ng color Rated capacity A 1 Generator circuit Black BIue 2 80 1 oo 2 2 ABS circuit control unit power supply Blue 20 3 ABS circuit hydraulic unit power supply Yellow 60 NOTE I I989 models From 1990 models Vehicles without ABS 1989 models 1990 models From 1990 5 models 16A1092 Vehicles with ABS 1989 models From 1990 models 16A1093 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 13: ... ACTIVE ECS circuit Green 40 4 Defogger circuit Pink 30 5 ignition switch and generator circuit Pink 30 6 Radiator fan motor and condenser fan motor circuit Pink 30 7 Headlight and tail light circuit Green 40 8 MFI circuit Blue 20 9 Automatic seatbelt circuit From 1990 models Pink 30 I W Y I ii 83 El q El 1 a I J Sub fusible link 16AO567 Vehicles without ABS 1990 models 16A1092 From 1990 5 models ...

Page 14: ...l unit A T ACC 7 15 8 10 IG1 9 10 Wiper and washer ETACS control unit 3 wiper relay Headlight relay horn Combination meter auto cruise control switch motor antenna ETACS control unit seat belt timer clutch pedal position switch 3attery Jnition witch 10 10 Hazard switch 11 20 ACTIVE ECS power relay 12 20 13 20 Sunroof relay 14 30 Heater relay 15 15 Stop light auto cruise control unit M T IGl 16 10 ...

Page 15: ...y Battery No Rated capacity A Housing color Circuit 1 10 Red Hazard light circuit 2 10 Red Taillight circuit 1 3 Battery 141 15 I Blue I ECS circuit I Headlight relay Battery 5 10 6 25 30 7 15 Red transparent Blue A C compressor circuit Condenser fan motor circuit Fog light circuit NOTE DOHC From 1992 models I Deciiczd f u s e 03 El m El TSB Revision ...

Page 16: ...ressor clutch relay Fog light relay NOTE I 1989 models 2 From 1991 models Relay box inside engine compartment Classification Name Passenger C 72X Power window relay compartment relay box c 73x Door lock relay c 75x Defogger timer I 16AO667 IOD or STORAGE CONNECTOR From 1991 models Passenger compartment relay box 74X El 73x I Y 72X El 16A0566 Classification Relay box inside engine compartment A 07 ...

Page 17: ...hen terminal stopper of connector is out of order engagement of male and female terminals becomes improper even when con nector itself is engaged perfectly and terminal sometimes slips out to rear side of connector Ascertain therefore that each terminal does not come off connector by pulling each harness wire ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING OF CONNECTOR TERMINAL Connector which gives loose engagement sha...

Page 18: ...it and pull out harness Caution Tool No 753787 l supplied by AMP can be used instead of screwdriver 4 Insert needle through a hole provided on terminal and raise contact point of male terminal ROUND WATERPROOF CONNECTOR 1 Remove waterproof cap by using a screwdriver 2 Insert tip of screwdriver 1 4 mm 06 in or 2 0 mm 08 in width into connector in a manner as shown in the figure raise housing lance ...

Page 19: ...gure push it lightly to raise housing lancer and pull out harness If right size screwdriver is not available convert a conven tional driver to suit the size Terminal lance wmSO I TSB Revision INJECTOR CONNECTOR 1 Remove waterproof cap 2 Insert tip of screwdriver 1 4 mm 06 in width into connector in a manner as shown in the figure press in terminal lance and pull out harness 3 Press contact point o...

Page 20: ...blems in the past must be taken into account Troubleshooting is carried out by making step by step checks until the true cause is found Always go through the procedures con sidering what check is to be made where for the best results After the problems are corrected be sure to check that the sys tem operates correctly Also check that new problems have not been caused by the repair INFORMATION FOR ...

Page 21: ...one or ground the light to the body by a jumper wire to deter mine which part is responsible for the problem 3 Checking with instruments Use an appropriate instrument in an adequate range and read the indication correctly You must have sufficient knowledge and experience to handle instruments correctly INSPECTION INSTRUMENTS In inspection make use of the following instruments 1 Test lights A test ...

Page 22: ...it voltage Normally the positive red lead probe is applied to the point of voltage measurement and the negative black lead probe to the body ground 5 Ohmmeter An ohmmeter is used to check continuity or measure resis tance of a switch or coil If the measuring range has been changed the zero point must be adjusted before measure ment CHECKING SWITCHES In a circuit diagram a switch is represented by ...

Page 23: ... ON the contact at the tip of the iron piece When the coil current is turned off the iron piece is made to return to its original position by a spring opening the contact OFF 2 By using a relay a heavy current can be turned on and off by a switch of small capacity For example in the circuit shown here when the switch is turned on closed current flows to the coil of the relay Then its contact is tu...

Page 24: ... fuse is blown there are two probable causes as follows One is that it is blown due to flow of current exceeding its rating The other is that it is blown due to repeated on off current flowing through it Which of the two causes is responsible can be easily determined by visual check as described below 1 Fuse blown due to current exceeding rating The illustration shows the state of a fuse blown due...

Page 25: ...dy and the vibrating parts such as the engine are made with adequate allowance for vibrations HANDLING ON VEHICLE BATTERY When checking or servicing does not require power from the on vehicle battery be sure to disconnect the cable from the battery terminal This is to prevent problems that could be caused by shorting of the circuit Disconnect the 1 terminal first and recon nect it last Caution 1 B...

Page 26: ...meter to the motor connector The test light should not come on or the voltmeter should indicate no voltage When the switch is turned on in this state the test light should come on or the voltmeter should indicate a voltage with motor starting to run Power supply A es1 ght Remove the fuse I 1 _ 4 The circuit illustrated here is normal but if there is any problem such as the motor failing to run che...

Page 27: ...connector and the illumination light 0 3 CHECKING CONTINUITY 1 When the switch is in the OFF position the self power test light should come on or the ohmmeter should read 0 ohm only when the terminals 1 and 2 are intercon nected 2 When the switch is the ON position the self power test light should come on or the ohmmeter should read 0 ohm only when the terminals 3 and 4 are intercon nected TSB Rev...

Page 28: ...28 NOTES ...

Page 29: ...and Transaxle 44 Engine Compartment DOHC Non Turbo 36 Engine Compartment DOHC Turbo 40 Engine Compartment SOHC 32 How to Read Configuration Diagrams 31 Instrument Panel 64 Interior DOHC 62 Interior SOHC 60 Luggage Compartment 66 Overall Configuration Diagram 30 Rear Under Floor 68 ...

Page 30: ...30 CONFIGURATION DIAGRAMS Overall Configuration Diagram OVERALL CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM M16V ...

Page 31: ...wiring diagram Note that if there is a concentration of connectors with the same form same number of prns the connnectors colors are noted in order to facilitate identification Example A l 2 01 Black Connector color indicates that the connector has been added as a result of model year change specifications change etc Number indicating the connector s characteristics series number F 134 Symbol indi...

Page 32: ...or clutch relay A 07 1X A 07 2X IOD or storage connector Refer to CENTRA LIZED JUNCTION A 08 Front wiring harness and control wiring harness combination A 09 Control wiring harness and battery cable assembly combination A T A 36 A 35 A 34 A 33 A 32 A 3 1 A 30 A IO thru A 12 A l 2 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 i 1 t Front wiring harness and front wiring harness combination Pressure switch...

Page 33: ...aw A 21 Dual pressure switch for air conditioning circuit A 31 Front turn signal light right side A 22 Headlight Type l left side A 32 n no A 33 I Horn right side H LJ A 24 Condenser fan motor for air conditioning circuit A 25 Condenser fan motor relay Hi for air conditioning circuit A 26 Condenser fan motor realy LO for air conditioning circuit A 27 A 28 A 29 Radiator fan motor A 30 Headlight Typ...

Page 34: ... motor A 51 A 52 A 53 A 54 A 55 A 56 A 57 A 49 A 48 A 47 A 46 A 45 A AA ELC 4 speed automatic transaxle control solenoid valve To engine and transaxle connector symbol q I A 50 A 5 1 A 52 A 53 A 54 A 55 A 56 A 57 Wiper motor Wiper relay Vehicles with ETACS Idle speed control motor position sensor 1989 models Auto cruise control actuator Auto cruise control vacuum pump Throttle position sensor 1989...

Page 35: ...58 A 59 A 60 Fuel pump check connector A 61 Ignition timing adjustment connector A 62 Brake fluid level sensor A 63 36AO319 fi m sdetails concerning the ground point example q refer to P 4 2 means that the connector with code number is not used 3 The mark shows the standard mounting position of wiring harness 4 l l Up to 1990 models 5 l From 1991 models TSB Revision ...

Page 36: ... control wiring harness combination A 09 Control wiring harness and battery cable assembly combination A T A l 0 ABS front speed sensor right side A l 1 ACTIVE ECS exhaust solenoide valve A 41 A 50 A 9 A 28 d27 To engine and tiansaxle connector symbol I A l 2 ACTIVE ECS air compressor A 12 1 Front wiring harness and front wiring harness combination A 13 ABS front speed sensor left side A l 3 l ABS...

Page 37: ...enoid valve Radiator fan motor Headlight Type I right side A 18 A 19 A 20 Remarks 1 For details concerning 36A0182 refer to P 4 2 means that the co the ground oint example q ctor with code number is noi used 3 The mark shows the standard mounting position oi wiring harness 4 l l Up to 1991 models 5 l 2 From 1992 models 6 IOD Ignition Off Draw A 3 1 Front turn signal light right side A 32 A 33 Horn...

Page 38: ...h A T Kickdown servo switch Pulse generator A T Automatic transaxle fluid temperature sensor Volume air flow sensor EGR solenoid Vehicles for California Washer motor ACTIVE ECS front actuator right side A 5 1 A 52 A 53 A 54 A 55 A 56 A 57 A 58 To engine and transaxle connector symbol HI Wiper motor Wiper relay Auto cruise control actuator Auto cruise control vacuum pump 2 Evaporative emission purg...

Page 39: ...solenoid valve A 60 Fuel pump check connector A 61 Ignition timing adjustment connector A 62 Brake fluid level sensor A 63 ACTIVE ECS front actuator left side Remarks I For details concerning the ground point example a refer to P 4 2 _ means that the connector with code number is not used 3 The mark shows the standard mounting position of wiring harness l I Up to 1990 models l From 1991 models TSB...

Page 40: ... Fog light relay A 07 2X IOD or storage connector A 08 Front wiring harness and control wiring harness combination A 09 A l 2 4 Theft alarm horn relay A 13 ABS front speed sensor left side A l 3 l ABS brake fluid pressure switch A l 3 2 A l 3 3 I ABS hydraulic unit A l 3 4 4WS fluid level sensor A 14 A 15 Pressure switch A 16 Front combination light left side A 17 Headlight Type 2 left side A 10 A...

Page 41: ...nsaxle connector symbol q I 1 For details concerning refer to P 4 2 i dmeans that the COI the ground point example q nnector with code number is not Headlight Type I left side 3 The mark shows the standard mounting position of wiring harness 4 Up to 1991 models 5 IOD Ignition Off Draw A 30 2 Fog light right side A 31 Front turn signal light right side A 32 A 33 I Horn right side A 34 Headlight Typ...

Page 42: ...axle connector symbol q A 42 thru i A 46 A 46 l Turbocharger waste gate solenoid A 46 2 Fuel pressure solenoid A 47 Volume air flow sensor A 48 EGR solenoid Vehicles for California A 49 Washer motor A 50 A 51 Wiper motor A 52 Wiper relay A 53 A 54 Auto cruise control actuator Auto cruise control vacuum pump 2 A 55 A 56 Evaporative emission purge solenoid A 57 A 57 l Resistor A 50 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 43: ...Remarks 1 For details concernrng the ground point example a refer to P 4 2 edmeans that the connector with code number is not 3 The mark t shows the standard mounting position of wiring harness 4 I Up to 1990 models 5 l From 1991 models A 59 A 60 Fuel pump check connector A 61 Ignition timing adjustment connector A 62 Brake fluid level sensor A 63 TSB Revision ...

Page 44: ...ature gauge unit Engine coolant temperature sensor Idle speed control motor SOHC or Idle air control motor DOHC EGR temperature sensor Vehicles for California Air conditioning compressor Control wiring harness and control wiring harness combination Ignition coil Condenser Ignition power transistor Injector No 1 Injector No 2 Injector No 3 Injector No 4 Power steering pressure switch Generator Oil ...

Page 45: ...ide view1 B l 1 B l B 06 B 13 B l 0 To engine connector B l 8 B l 9 B 20 B 21 B 22 compartment symbol iI Starter motor B 2 B 14 B l 5 B l 6 To engine compartment connector symbol i Oxygen sensor SOHC or Heated oxygen sensor DOHC Back up light switch M T Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch B 17 1 To rear side view1 ...

Page 46: ...B 03 Idle speed control motor SOHC or Idle air control motor DOHC B 04 EGR temperature sensor Vehicles for California B 05 Air conditioning compressor B 06 Control wiring harness and control wiring harness combination B 07 Ignition coil B 08 Condenser B 09 Ignition power transistor B l 0 Injector No 1 B l 1 Injector No 2 B l 2 Injector No 3 Remarks B l 3 Injector No 4 1 The mark shows the standard...

Page 47: ... comoartment symbol 36A0126 view tment El To enbine comoartment symbol q I i B121 B l 8 To rear side view B l 9 t Starter motor B 20 Oxygen sensor SOHC or Heated oxygen sensor DOHC B 21 Back up light switch M T B 22 Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch B 22 l Condenser AWD B 22 2 Closed throttle position switch B 22 3 Engine speed detection connector TSB Revision ...

Page 48: ...r Idle air control motor DOHC B 13 B 14 B l 5 B l 6 B 17 Injector No 4 Power steering pressure switch I Generator Oil pressure switch B 04 EGR temperature sensor Vehicles for California B 04 1 Knock sensor Turbo B 05 Air conditioning compressor B 06 Control wiring harness and control wiring harness combination B 07 Ignition coil B 08 Condenser B 09 Ignition power transistor B 09 1 Crankshaft posit...

Page 49: ...vie To engine compart connector symbol B 21 B l 8 B l 9 I Starter motor B 20 Oxygen sensor SOHC or Heated oxygen sensor DOHC B 21 Back up light switch M T B 22 Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch B 22 l Condenser AWD B 22 2 Closed throttle position switch 36AO306 To rear side view B 22 3 Engine speed detection connector B 22 4 Engine coolant temperature switch for air conditioning c...

Page 50: ...04 EGR temperature sensor Vehicles for California B 04 1 B 05 Air conditioning compressor B 06 Control wiring harness and control wiring harness combination B 07 Ignition coil B 08 Condenser B 09 Ignition power transistor I B 18 B O1 B O2 B 02 5 36AO328 To engine compartment connector symbol q I B 09 1 Crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor B l 0 Injector No 1 B l 1 Injector No 2 ...

Page 51: ...J AWL P To engine compartment 7 m connector symbol q 36AO320 36AO321 compartment symbol RI A To rear side view B l 8 B l 9 I Starter motor B 20 Oxygen sensor SOHC or B 22 2 Closed throttle position switch Heated oxygen sensor DOHC B 22 3 Engine speed detection connector B 21 Back up light switch M T B 22 4 B 22 Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch B 22 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 52: ...FI relay C 1 6 Body wiring harness and instrument panel wirrng harness combination c 1 7 Turn signal and hazard flasher unit Z 18 Data link connector c 19 C 20 c 21 c 22 C 23 C 24 C 25 C 26 C 26 C 27 C 28 c 29 c 30 c 3 1 C 32 c 33 c 34 c 35 Body wiring harness and roof wiring harness combination Front wiring harness and body wiring harness combination Front wiring harness and body wiring harness c...

Page 53: ... Vehicles with an air conditioning 3 I 36AOl77 C 27 C 28 C 29 Junction block To interior connector symbol q 3 7 To instrument panel connector symbol 0 Remarks 1 For details concerning the ground point example a refer to P 4 2 I means that the connector with code number is not used 3 The symbol indicates models for which the automatic transaxle is optional c 37 C 36 c 35 c 34 16Al264 Front side 1eA...

Page 54: ... circuit Up to 1990 models Combination meter Combination meter A T Combination meter Blower switch Heater control illumination light Blower resistor Blower motor Body wiring harness and air conditioning wiring harness combination Body wiring harness and control wiring har ness combination AA To interior connector symbol 03 C 59 I ELC 4 speed automatic transaxle control C 60 m o d u l e C 60 1 ELC ...

Page 55: ...oning unit 36AO177 cVehicles with an air conditioning 3 36AOO79 Remarks 1 For details concerning the ground point example H refer to P 4 2 i dmeans that the connector with code number is not To interior connector symbol q Junction block To instrument panel connector symbol q 16Al264 1 TSB Revision Front side Rear side ...

Page 56: ... and control wiring harness combination MFI control unit Instrument panel wiring harness and ACTIVE ECS wiring harness combination Oxygen sensor check connector MFI relay Body wiring harness and instrument panel wiring harness combination c 17 C l 8 c 19 c 20 c 21 c 22 C 23 C 24 C 25 C 26 C 26 l C 27 C 28 c 29 c 30 c 3 1 C 32 c 33 Turn signal and hazard flasher unit Data link connector Diode for A...

Page 57: ...tion block c 37 1 combination C 38 thru Body wiring harness and junction block P nn combination Remarks To interior connector 1 For details concerning the ground I D n point example HI c 14 36A0176 c Vehicles with an air conditioning 3 c 2 8 c 59 36AOO79 Junction block To instrument panel connector symbol a c 44 c 43 LAz c 33 cm Ll I rerer IV i k 2 means that the connector with code number is not ...

Page 58: ...for auto cruise circuit Up to 1990 models 3 48 3 49 3 50 3 51 z 52 z 53 I 54 z 55 3 56 3 57 Diode for 4WS fluid level warning light circuit I991 and 1992 models Combination meter Combination meter A T Combination meter Blower switch Heater control illumination light Blower resistor Blower motor I 58 Body wiring harness and air conditioning wiring harness combination Body wiring harness and control...

Page 59: ...r symbol 0 1 To interior connector symbol q 3 Vehicles with an air conditioning 1 I I C 63 C 62 C 61 iir conditioning unit 3610079 To interior connector Remarks For details concerning the ground point example q refer to P 4 Junction block To instrument panel connector symbol q I 16A1264 Front side Rear side J TSB Revision ...

Page 60: ...ont door light right side D 13 Dome light Vehicles without sunroof D l 3 l Door latch switch right side D l 4 Front door lock actuator right side r D 48 nh7T To dash panel connector symbol a To rear under floor connector symbol 0 D l 5 I Body wiring harness and rear door wiring D l 6 harness combination right side D l 7 Rear power window motor right side D 18 Rear power window sub switch right sid...

Page 61: ...ower window motor left side D 35 D 36 D 37 D 38 D 38 D 39 D 40 1 Diode for sunroof circuit t Body wiring harness and front door wiring harness combination left side 36A0104 Remarks I The mark shows the standard mounting position of wiring harness 2 For details concerning the ground point example q refer to P 4 3 1 1 means that the connector with code number is not used 4 l 1991 models Cl ehicles w...

Page 62: ...of D 07 Sunroof motor D 08 Door mirror right side D 09 Dome light Vehicles with sunroof D l 0 Map light Vehicles without sunroof D l 1 Front power window sub switch right side D l l l Vanity mirror light D l 2 Front door light right side D l 3 Dome light Vehicles without sunroof D l 3 l Door latch switch right side D 14 Front door lock actuator right side D l 4 l Front door key cylinder switch rig...

Page 63: ...actuator left side D 34 l Door latch switch left side D 46 l Automatic seatbelt control unit D 43 Seat belt switch D 43 l Seatbelt buckle switch D 43 Z Automatic seatbelt left side D 43 3 Front door key cylinder switch left side D 44 Over drive switch NE D 44 l ABS G sensor front AWD D 45 Parking brake switch D 46 EPS mode changeover switch D 35 D 36 D 37 D 38 D 38 D 39 D 40 D 41 D 41 D 42 I I 1 F...

Page 64: ...6 E 14 E l E 12 E l 1 E l 0 E 09 E 08 Tl3 dash panel C onnector symbol 0 J 38AOO31 E 01 E 02 E 03 E 04 E 05 E 06 E 07 E 08 E 09 Rheostat Front speaker left side ACTIVE KS indicator Clock Glove box light Front speaker right side Glove box light switch Ashtray illumination light Heater control panel illumination light TSB Revision ...

Page 65: ...el connector symbol q E l 0 Cigarette lighter illumination light E l 1 E 12 1 Cigarette lighter E l 3 Hazard switch E l 4 Seatbelt warning buzzer E l 5 Defogger switch E b v vI 364003Q To dash panel connector symbol q Remark The mark shows the standard mounting position of wiring harness TSB Revision ...

Page 66: ...er unlock switch F 02 2 Trunk lid switch F 03 Licence plate light right side F 03 1 Rear lid light right side F 04 Luggage compartment light switch F 05 ACTIVE ECS rear actuator right side F 06 Body wiring harness and ACTIVE ECS wiring harness combination F 07 F 08 F 09 F 09 1 F l 0 F l 1 F 12 F l 2 l Rear speaker right side Luggage compartment light High mounted stop light Vehicles without air sp...

Page 67: ...rker light right side Rear combination light right side Fuel pump and gauge unit assembly AWD Rear combination light left side ABS control unit Rear side marker light left side Body wiring harness and luggage compartment wiring harness combination F 25 l ABS resistor AWD l F 25 2 Power amplifier Vehicles with CD player F 26 Motor antenna Remarks 1 For details concerning the ground point example m ...

Page 68: ... FWD G 02 To interior connector symbol q 16AO266 AWD G 01 G 1 7 16AO267 G 01 ABS rear speed sensor left side G 02 ABS rear speed sensor right side G 03 Fuel gauge unit G 04 Fuel pump G 05 ACTIVE ECS rear height sensor G 03 G 04 G 05 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 69: ...58 Electronic Control Power Steering EPS Circuit 323 Fog Light Circuit 54 46 Headlight Circuit 54 41 Heater Circuit 197 Horn Circuit 54 104 How to Read Circuit Diagrams 70 Ignition Circuit 16 34 Indicator Light Circuit 54 22 Luggage Compartment Light Glove Compartment Light and Vanity Mirror Light Circuit 54 54 Meter and Gauges Circuit 54 12 MFI Circuit Power Distribution Circuit g Power Window Ci...

Page 70: ...rent flows If the same connector IS shown at two or more locations the connector is Indicated by fi with connector symbol shown inside An X at the end of a connector No indicates that the connector is con nected to a centralized junction that is shown in the section Centralized Junction Indicates power takeout Indicates the operating condltlons of the engine coolant switch etc I lndlcates that the...

Page 71: ... connected to the same device markings indicating the same connector are connected by a broken line Indicates input output to from Input Input Output output py Indicates vehicle body ground harnesses on the oppo site page of a double indicates that the terminal is a spare one if the device sensor in this case is not provided TSB Revision ...

Page 72: ...72 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS How to Read Circuit Diagrams CONNECTOR GROUND INDICATIONS TSB Revision 1 P ...

Page 73: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS How to Read Circuit Diagrams No 1 Layout indications Symbol Description e connector at the harness TSB Revision ...

Page 74: ...erator Buzzer Chime fhyristor Piezo electric element a Thermister Light emitting diode Photo diode Photo transistor 16AO262 WIRING COLOR CODES Wire colors are identified by the following color codes Example 1 25F GB ticcolor 1 LB Marking color 1680244 1 25 Wire size mm F Flexible wire T Twisted wire 1 No code Indicates 0 5 mm2 t 0008 in 2 Cable color code In parentheses indicates 0 3 mm2 0005 rn 2...

Page 75: ...75 NOTES ...

Page 76: ...T 1989 MODELS BATTERY MAIN FUSIBLE LINK GENERATOR S TERMINAL C 25 CD 8 20A 40A 8 MFI I 7 t z RELAY El A 7 t c COLUMN SWITCH HEAD LIGHT k F DEDICATED FUSE 0 8 G9 10A 101 COMBINATION METERCBEAM 1 25 RW 4 i IGHT i A 02X tN El 44 1 2 G COLUMN SWITCH g IS AC H0105 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 77: ...AGRAMS Power Distribution Circuit 7 7 8 30A 8 COND FAN h I 2 CL I RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 25A a 10A DEFOGGER RELAY a 4 15A cl3 30A I a a A T L l ECS COMPRESSOR ii RELAY RE ECS RETURN PUMP RELAY LA 0 lOA i TSB Revision ...

Page 78: ...TCH H T COLUMN SWITCH TURN SIGNAL SWITCH LIGHT SWITCH 1 f i f HEAfER OVER DRIVE SWITCH DEFOGGER TIMER ELC 46PEEO Kz RAL x1 POWER WINDOWS AUTOMATIC TRANGAXLE NROOF POEWR CONTROL MODULE 7 AUTO CRUlGE CONTROL UNIT ABS POWER RELAY I 3E RADIO WIPER RELAY CLOCK WIPER AND WASHER MOTOR ANTENNA ETACS CONTROL UNIT RADIATOR FAN MOTOR lSER FAI MOTOR RELAY I c 43 I REMARKS 1 THE ABOVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SHOWS THE...

Page 79: ...I DOOR LOCK RELAY UITCH ACT SYS MULTI PURPOSE FUSE iilEiq m SUNROOF HEATER RELAY RELAY STOP LIGHT AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT CLOCK DOME LIGHT LIGHT OJR k G VEH CL WITHClUT SUNROOF ETACS CONTROL NROOF RELAY 2 3 X1 INDICARES VEHICLES WITHOUT AN ETACS CONTROL UNIT 4 2 INDICATES VEHICLES WITH AN ETACS CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision I ...

Page 80: ...LS BATTERY I GENERATOR S TERMINAL IL C 25 El 1 FUSIBLE LINK BOX MAIN FUSIBLE LINK STARTER MOTOR _I _ 11 dTAULIC A OWER GEi TOR B TERMINAL1 MF t s COLUMN SWITCH COLUMN SW ITCH HEAD LIGHT kii ERNGl MB CANG kCATED CD 8 10A 10A z I COMBINATION METERCBEAM 135 AC HOlO NY 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 81: ...IBLE LINK VEHICLES WITH VEHICLES WITHOUT ABS ABS 3 3 cl CL t v AUTk EATBELT CONTROL UNIT 8 CONE FAN RADIATbR DEFOGGER FAN MOTOR RELAY CD 30A D cl 5A 0 10A 15A c3 30A ECS POWER RELAY COMPRESSOR LJW ECS RETURN PUMP RELAY CL 0 10A NOID E RELAY L TSB Revision ...

Page 82: ...DALCOJ UMN SWITCH k2NE T TURN BIGNAL GWITCH LIGHT SWITCH 1 t IGHT HEATER T I DEFOGGER TIMER OVER DRI RAL X1 POWER WINDOWS ELC 46PEI A T MATI T P ZLK5 00 FoEwR o CUI iAZOWER RELAY CONTROL I RADIATOR FAN MOTOR NGER FAN MOTOR RELAY __ 5WJTCH tEGAXLE i I 1934 la33 6678 i c 43 RADIO WIPER RELAY ANTENNA WIPER AND WASHER ETACB CONTROL UNIT REMARKS 1 THE ABOVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SHOWS THE CURRENT FLOW AT THE...

Page 83: ...IRROR HAZAR ATED Q SUB LINK MULTI PURPOSE FUSE 3OOR LOCK RELAY HEATER RELAY G I PROL UN17 COMPARTMENT 7 v ITCH ACTIVE ECS SYSTEM SUNROOF RELAY fXNROOQ RELAY AUTOYATIC SEATEELT CONTROL UNIT 3 tl INDICARES VEHICLES WITHOUT AN ETACS CONTROL UNIT 4 2 INDICATES VEHICLES WITH AN ETACS CONTROL UNIT 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 84: ...BUTION CIRCUIT 1990 5 models BATTERY v GENERATOR 5 TERMINAL Q C 25 El I FUSIBLE LINK BOX MAIN FUSIBLE LINK 2 J I Al r L LAIA STARTER MOTOR v t vt il AULIC z AF OWER GENERATOR BTERMINAL TCH COMBINATION METERtBEAM COLUMN SWITCH KMN X85 AC HOlOB NM 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 85: ...ution Circuit VEHICLES VEHICLES WITH ABS WITHOUT ABS AUTOMATIC SEATBELT CONTROL UNIT 43 30A Q 25A CON1 FAN 2 A I RADIATOR FAN MOTOR Q 10A ECS POWER COMPRESSOR j i i W RELAY ECS RETURN 5 PUMP RELAY cl 0 10A iIOID f RELAY TSB Revision ...

Page 86: ...TER DEFOGGER TIbtER OVER ORI ELC 46PEI dPyOWER WINDOW6 R 18E f f tl 6UNROOF POEVR AUTO CRUI kA OWER RELAY CONTROL I 5 1 CL 1 IGNITION SWITCH RADIATOR iBEA oToR CONDENSER FAJ MOTOR RELAY _ _ 1 C 66 123 lilzl 458 0 10A 15A i WITCH L g fE AXLE REM0 HIRRI RADIO WIPER RELAY k t ANTENNA WIPER AND WAGHER ETACS CONTROL UNIT REMARKS 1 THE ABOVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SHOWS THE CURRENT FLOW AT THE IGNITION KEY POS...

Page 87: ...ROR HAZAR TATED SUB Q LINK ti DOOR LOCK RELAY SWITCH ACT SYBY IBLE q I3 C 36 MULTI PURPOSE FUSE xI SUNROOF RELAY BTOP L I GHT i2 SUNROOF RELA I RADIO AUTOMATIC BEATBELT CONTROL UNIT 31x1 INDICARES VEHICLES WITHOUT AN ETACS CONTROL UNIT 41t2 INDICATES VEHICLES WITH AN ETACS CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision ...

Page 88: ...TOR GENERATOR S TERM1 NAL m C 25 Eli I IS AC no1 2 NW CIRCUIT FUSIBLE LINK BOX MAIN FUSIBLE LINK 7 iy AUL C gfA OWER GEiifi TOR B TERMINAL1 f CATED 0 s 2 10A 10 i COMBINATION ME TER BEAM Remarks 1 0 1991 models 2 A 19 models 3 DOHC From 1992 models 4 A SOHC I993 models TAILLIGHT RELAY A 02X ffl 34 COLUMN SWITCH t UING TSB Revision I ...

Page 89: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Power Distribution Circuit 89 RAD IATOR FAN MOTOR I 8 0 GD 10A 10A 15A 25A F z al I 3 T 5 N cu IL 3 a3 4 d v t ECS CONDENSER SOLENOID FAN MOTOR VALVE RELAY TSB Revision ...

Page 90: ...ti H F AP vN uTI P031TlON SWITCH A UNIT A JTOHATIC SEATEELT CONTROL UNIT I CLUTCH PEDALCOLUMN SWITCH POSITION SWITCH M T LIGHT GWITCH TURN SIGNAL SWITCH IGM HEATER L DEFOGGER TIMER L ER WINDOw RDpR SWITCH I I OJ AXLE dLX NROOF POWER AUTO CRUISE AB9 POWER RELAY CONTROL UNIT I g WIPER RELAY W I PER AND WASHER MOTOR ANTENNA t TACG CONTROL UNIT Remarks 1 The above circuit diagram shows the current flo...

Page 91: ...Distribution Circuit 91 D 7 T OX LIGHI GHT MIRRt3R HAZAR CATED p SUB LINt DOOR LOCK RELAY W I T C H IBLE 3 X1 Indicates vehicles without an ETACS control unit 4 t2 Indicates vehicles with an ETACS control unit TSB Revision I ...

Page 92: ...991 mode I s BATTERY i OR tiINAL rn C 25 Bl t FUSIBLE LINK BOX 5 MAIN FUSIBLE LINK y AULlC EBA OWER GENERATOR B TERMINAL I Li FGH7 A 01X ITI 3z MFI RELAY c1 0 40A 7 COLUMN SWITCH HEAD LIGHT km FOG LIGHT COMBINATION RELAY METERtBEAM Remarks 110 1991 models Ti A l models TSB Revision I ...

Page 93: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Power Distribution Circuit 93 I AUTOMATIC SEATBELT CONTROL UNIT 25 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 0 10A SER TOR 7 I DEFOGGER RELAY zW 0 1OA TSB Revision I ...

Page 94: ...TROL AT R MFI RELAY IGHT HEATER DEFOGGER TIMER A86 POWER RELAY 5 1 CL RAOIATOR FAN MOTOR ZNSER FAI MOTOR RELAY ETiCS CONTROL UNIT g K WIPER RELAY WIPER AND WABHER YOTOR ANTENNA ETACS CONTROL UNIT Remarks 1 The above circuit diagram shows the current flow at the ignition key positions ACC ON and ST combined 2 Be sure trace the appropriate circuit depending on the ignition key oositlon xX35 AC H0113...

Page 95: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Power Distribution Circuit DEDIC FUSE LON STLIGH7 1 RROR CATED SUB LINf fBLE El 1 C 36 MULTI PURPOSE FUSE v DOOR LOCK RELAY v D SWITCH SUNROOF RELAY vy RINTROL BNIF RF I I TSB Revision ...

Page 96: ...uit SOHC MFI CIRCUIT SOHC 1989 m o d e l s SUB FUSIBLE LINK MFI RELAY c 15 1234 IED 1378 ER IGNITION SWITCH ST T C OB OFF T ON 8 2 BW 0 KPUMP CONNECTOR M t I 109 _ 108 _ _ e m r T I CT 1 cp 6 m CL 04 m X35 AC H0525 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 97: ... CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 97 ION H IGl 2 B IISTRIBUTO Eb IGNITION 1 ISTOF B 09 liiizil 0 IOA 64 L t SUB FU IBLE LINK 1 f T a El g I cb AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT i6 c 57j Ralq A 08 6 ...

Page 98: ...89 models IGN TRAl I Ki s g p N L 1 VOLUME AIR FLOW GENSOR cu A2 2 IGNITION SWITCHtIGl Q IDLE SPEED CONTROL MOTOR llJ iYk POSITION SENSOR THROTTLE EGR A 53 AF ANT F W ON SENSOR i TURE A 55 VEHICLES FOR B 02 B m CALIFORNIA B 04 m A 57 KX35 AC H0525A NY 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 99: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 99 OXYGEf ENSOR 1 Pv EHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA 5V r 5 J _ 1 B I OXYGEN SENSOR VEHICLES FOR FEDERAI B 20 TSB Revision ...

Page 100: ...100 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC MFI CIRCUIT SOHC 1990 models i C SUB FUSIBLE L I N K A 08 2 c 4 TER IGNITION SWITCH ST l G 3 C 24 CL 108 v t35 AC H0520 NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 101: ...CH IG1 1 A IGNITION COIL B 07 Flm 4 2 g2 ti B 06 DISTRIBUTOR g 3 m IGNITION 1 p g TOR 1Em 2 1m J 1 54 _ _ _ _ 8 I 5 izW NCONDI 1 COW AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UYIT 10 b 6 8c 57 f 4 4 12 C 23 ON 2100kPa 2SSPS i 1 OFF 2700kPa 384Ps i 1 A 08 6 TSB Revision ...

Page 102: ...102 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC MFI CIRCUIT CONTINUED SOHC 1990 models MFI RE Y IGNITION SWITCHtIGl m jb VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR A 57 MPI CONTROL UNIT L t KX35 AC H0528A NY TSB Revision ...

Page 103: ...XYGE t ENSOR VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA T POWER STEER1 NG PRESSURE SWITCH r di I n l c 40 pmi q C 38 I 2 EB 3 4 ENG DATA C 18 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR B 03 g IDLE SPEED CONTROL MOTOR OXYGEN SENSOR VEH I CLES FOR FEDERA I 1 B 20 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 104: ...HC MFI CIRCUIT SOHC 1991 and 1992 models FER IGNITION SWITCHGT I iii A 2 3 C 24 3 ______________ t C 08 a i _________ _______ _____ __ ___ _ __ 7 c SUB FUSIBLE LINK 2 BW 0 A 09 I kKPuMp NNECTOR A 08 109 1 1 POWER SOURCE 1 TSR Revision 1 ...

Page 105: ... Circuit SOHC 105 TION CH IG1 2 B W M SOR 1 c 30 2 I AUTO CONT C 7 0 10A 2 C 23 3 Pp cu 1 ON 235ItPa GR r EP sl3 WITION lTli I 1 ifISTOR l5Ea 2 ti m 2 I 1 I 54 v ___ 7 em 65 1 la m t _ 3 34 I BATTERY BACK UP TSB Revision I ...

Page 106: ...AGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC MFI CIRCUIT CONTINUED SOHC 1991 and 1992 models MFI RELAY IGNITION SWJTCHiIGl IGh TRP ION POWER ISTOR 7 MFI R E L AY 7 0Cl r POWER BOURCE V V GND CALIFORNIA KX35 AC H0534A MY TSB Revision ...

Page 107: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 107 B 20 I I OXYGEN SENSOR 1 I VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA I INJECTC B 10 E l 5v 4 e 12 I 1 _ i8 1 1 6 39 c 11 ENG DATA A 61 IDLE SPEED CONTROL MOTOR TSB Revision I ...

Page 108: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC MFI CIRCUIT SOHC From 1993 models IGNITION SWITCHtST SUB LINK BLE S RI EER i5 c 4 8 zs c kpuw CONNECTOR MFI CONTROL UNIT 1 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 109: ...NSER B 02 5 El s e IGNITION COIL I 3UTOR ION ISTOR DISTRIBUTOR iASSEMBLY I I I I i jJ 28 02 3 I 22 2 COMBINATION METER TACHO1 10 a 9 1 COMBINATION METER C 52 3 1 DEDICATED FUSE GR PTJRSoR b 1 c 30 6 57pmzq 12 C 23 2 1 ON 235mPa di WbkPa A 21 30Ds II ON 2100kPa 2EwDS I A 08 6 j5 1 0 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 110: ...IRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC MFI CIRCUIT CONTINUED SOHC From 1993 models RAY IGNITION SWlTCJ IGl KX35 AC H0538A NM VOLUME filR Fl ilW SENSflR a IV I _ AEfiF c VOLW AIR QIW A 47 I E 02 4 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 111: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC INJECTOR IDLE SPEED CONTRO O3MOTOR e 5 18 I Y e e 62 63 P If 15 i F 2 1 10 J 54 CONNECTOR TSB Revision ...

Page 112: ... Data link connector S Oxygen sensor A EGR solenoid California K Park neutral position switch A T M EGR temperature sensor California L Power steering pressure switch U Engine control module 0 Throttle position sensor D Engine coolant temperature sensor E Vehicle speed sensor reed switch P Evaporative emission purge solenoid H Volume air flow sensor incorporating intake Fuel pump check terminal T ...

Page 113: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 113 I6FUO655 1981 9 models T rrJ pJY q 1 ihroitle position ...

Page 114: ...114 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 6FUO612 A0411 Vehicle speed Sensor I 16A04111 6FUO984 1 ...

Page 115: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 9115 data link connector m 6FUO I 6FUO985 TSB Revision ...

Page 116: ...116 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC COMPONENT LOCATION 16VALVE NOTE The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order TSB Revision I ...

Page 117: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 117 Throttle position sensor ff with closed throttle Bosition switch g 6FUO985 TSB Revision I ...

Page 118: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC I 6FU1934 Check engine malfunction indicator lamp WA0093 MA Ignition coil 6FU1933 1 r M i A FUOt35 __ Air conditioning Al _ 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 119: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit SOHC 119 r k c iniection relav 16A0411 TSB Revision ...

Page 120: ... CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC MFI CIRCUIT DOHC 1989 mOd8IS jTyER IBLE 3 wz SUB LINK c 3 __ C 08 3 13 4E i i I C 3 ______ ___ _ 2 BW a A 06 3 0 c XXKPUMP ONNECTOR PUMP ON I I m siI g 3 c 135AC HO520 NY ...

Page 121: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC I Gl SW I I c ION H IGl TSB Revision 1 IGNITION COIL J 6 I COMBINATION METER 3 0 7 J B 1 1 1 13 ...

Page 122: ... models IGNITION POWER MFI TRANSISTOR RELAY m _ MFI C gROL 1 i 1 25 R Q m VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR s WTAKE AIR VOLWQ A 47 TEMPERATURE AlP ILOW 8e 80R RRRROR L 3 5 4 6 1 1 m E 3 I 5V A 57 m 22 121 TROL UNIT _ _ v OXYGEN SENSOR CHECK CONNECTOR KX35 AC H0528A NY TSB Revision ...

Page 123: ...t DOHC 123 3 3 59 G W 1 7 68 ___ 8 v POWER STEERING FF Eli 3 13 15 i E3 1 10 ENG DATA IGNITION _ _ v m n IJATA LlNK 11MllW CONNECTOR ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR C 18 A 61 FRONT SIDE igWs BMERATURE VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA TSR Revision I ...

Page 124: ... CALIFORNIA 08 I J 103 BATTE 3 Y j Y 1 rIba B 05 12 El 3 I MAGNETTC CLUTCH MFI CONTROL UNIT FUSIBLE LINb i 0 10A A 07X 124 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROq UNIT 7 DEDICATED FUSE 5 t 8 C 23 ON 2100kPa 299Ps i 1 OFF 2700kPa 384Ps i 1 KX35 AC H05280 NM TSB Revision ...

Page 125: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC 125 MFI CIRCUIT DOHC 1990 models R IBLE 3 WE SUB LINK 2 3 c ____ ___ C 08 234 m 5678 ii I cl A OS PuMP rONNECTOR 3 m 3 I m 12346 87881 c 15 I TSB Revision ...

Page 126: ...FI CIRCUIT CONTINUED DOHC 1990 models IGN SWI 1 c c __ a2 ION I IGIl 2 BW 7 CONDENSER AWD z c IGNITION COIL B 07 12 a 3 TO SPARK PLUG c 43 C IOA c 39 IGNITION 7 POWER TRANSISTOR r T 2 3 m ENGINE SPEED IJ T 09 7 1 J B 7 3 rl 13 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 127: ... 1 25 R 1 al VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR s I n CRANKSHAFT INTAKE AIR VOLLW TENPERATORE 1111 FLZM BENNOR NENNOR A 47 I I 4 I I I 5 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR i 1 B 20 OXYGEN SENSOR CHECK CONNECTOR c 14 ENGINE COOLANT P ATURE B 02 I Iii Ef KX95 AC HO NY TSB Revision ...

Page 128: ...I Circuit DOHC MFI CIRCUIT CONTINUED DOHC 1990 models a IQ a f7 fzaq ENG DATA DATA LINK CONNECTOR I I I C 18 FRONT SIDE 8 TSB Revision I1 B 04 ml IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR A 61 fG 6 ERATURE VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA ...

Page 129: ...Circuit DOHC 129 El 7 C 36 J B r 0 MFI RELAY A 48 g EGR SOLENOID IHEICLES FOF CALIFORNIA 1 Fi tQl 53 c 10 V FUSIBLE LII AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT ON 2lOOkPa 299Psi OFF 270Ok b 384Ps i 1 MFI CONTROL UNIT B 22 TSB Revision ...

Page 130: ...IT DOHC 1991 models Non Turbo STAI RELI SR 130 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC IGNITION SWITCHtST pJEJKPUMP CONNECTOR 2 n J A T A i T I I f 104 __ ___ __ _ FUEL PUMP GAUGE ASSEMBLY I L 6 LF a cu TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 131: ... Es _ _ ION IGl 2 BW 7 C 08 B 22 al CONDENSER zi 4WD cl j iii d 10 _ _ 1 IGNITION POWER TRANSISTOR B 09 _ 3 109 I5 C 39 GNITION COIL B 07 i B 22 3 I23 SPEED ION TOR COMBINATION METER r I c 09 5 E i7 i L I 1 a 13 J B TSB Revision I 1 ia 54 I 55 _ __ _ __ ____ ...

Page 132: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC MFI CIRCUIT CONTINUED DOHC 1991 models n Turbo AY _ 1 1 1 2 G I 8 e lL j21 t TROL U N I T t 1 1 1 GND GND m 1 OXYGEN SENSOR CHECK CONffECTOR KX35 AC H0535A NM TSB Revision ...

Page 133: ... DOHC 133 IDLE AIR CONTROL MOTOR B 03 5v 4 ______ ______ ____ l 1 12 I_________r ______ ____ __ r r 1 2 F I B 04 J B 14 r IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR A 61 m Ws gMERATURE VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA REVERSESIDE TSB Revision I ...

Page 134: ...EEJ J B AY c 39 c 09 E 1 1 EGK x SOLENOID I HEICLES FOF CALIFORNIA E 53 c 10 1 1 1 IOD OR STORAGE CONNECTOR FUSIBLE LINK 3 m A 07X F AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT 1k BCATED kl c 30 piaq PA 00 103 3 BATTERY BACK UP 1 e B 22 1 f c3 I odll B 05 Ye IQ s I MAGNETIC CLUTCH MFI CONTROL UNIT KX35 AC H0535B NY TSB Revision ...

Page 135: ...CUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC 135 MFI CIRCUIT DOHC 1992 models Non Turbo 6TAl RELi 3R C A 41 BUB FU IBLE LINK 8 d i Ll tJbKPUMP ONNECTOR r A c 15 MFI RELAY aid 4 d 5 8 6 7 2 ILJ z al m g Al L TSB Revision ...

Page 136: ...D DOHC 1992 models IGN SW1 I I ti zI ON Non Turbo 1 IG 2 BW B 22 m CONDENSER 2 4WD A z d 10 C 4 c 1 C 2 IGNITION COIL B 07 I3 I 3 E ZPARK L IGNITION POWE en R ESISTOR I d 109 m 7 z t 54 b fO NATION r ENGINE SPEED DETECTION CONNECTOR C O 7 1 J B I TSB Revision ...

Page 137: ... D 4 MFI RELAY i r 1 25 R a 12 VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR AY a A 47 i ii ENSOR AND I SENSOR 3 m 10 I I 22 21 t TROL UNIT _ ______ _ V Y L 5 KNOCK 1 SENSOR 1 B 04 1 1 B 02 1 ia B 02 1 B 20 Lx OXYGEN SBN8OR J y CHECK CONNSCTOR m c 14 H L m I TSB Revision ...

Page 138: ...Circuit DOHC MFI CIRCUIT CONTINUED DOHC 1992 models Non Turbo C 4d ta pFjz Eq J B 03 5v b ah 7 Afs _ _ _ _ ES ri Ts _____ ENG DATA iT k E POWER 4 C 18 STEER1 NE E Fp iR m 1 FRONT SIDE cl fi mJ REVERSE SIDE B 04 lml TSB Revision ...

Page 139: ...0A z A 07 2X 4 lizEd I 1OD OR Ii 54 STORAGE CONNECTOli MFI RELAY EGH A 48 SDLENOID l j VHEICLES FOR CALIFORNIA A 07X p El CONDITIONING 3 4 AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT z 12 c 23 G 2 DUAL PRESSURE SW1 TCH A 21 OF a B 22 MAGNETIC CLUTCH MFI CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision ...

Page 140: ...140 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC MFI CIRCUIT DOHC 1993 m o d e l s Non Turbo 2 4 I C 08 5 7 5 J i XNNECTOR al ps_ 4 104 __ ____ 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 141: ... MFI Circuit DOHC IGN SWI I z ti C 08 25 c m 110 _ 2 BW A GNITION COIL B 07 I I 1 IGNITION 7 POWER g TRANSISTOR B 09 t 5 f 109 COMBINATION METER r ENGINE SPEED Y 2 DETECTION 3 CONNECTOR c o m 1 3 J B 7 13 TSB Revision ...

Page 142: ...1993 models F I Non Turbo ghROL ELAY UNIT I TV I MFI RFbAY 0 12 VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR lnTAYr AIR VOLUKe A 47 TLKPRRATMC AIR FLOY 8CYBOR 8l YROR i NSOR AND i N SENSOR A 57 3 5 4 6 1 G s 4 A V A V f z 121 k TROL UNIT V m KNOCK SENSOR B 04 1 OXYGEN SENSOR TSB Revision ...

Page 143: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC 143 Gj V V V V Y v 5 18 1 2 12 9 ENG DATA 3 I1 POWER STEERING yygJRE C 18 FRONT SIDE EERq REVFiRBE SIDE IGNITION TIMING JU T A 61 El I I I I1 2 l B 04 I 3 TSB Revision ...

Page 144: ...OR 1234 STORAGE CONNECTOF EB 2 1254 c 37 1 2 J B MFI RELAY W A 48 J A 07X j AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT B t 12 c 23 4 OF N 1 3OPS I ON 2100kPa 299 s I OFF 27OOhPa 38aDS I AIR CONDITIONING f ERSSOR RELAY A 08 I 2 si B 22 s 1 AIR a9 CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT N TURE 2 DN lOO C 22e FE OF llSdW KXSI AC HO53QB NY 3 do B 05 lb IB s I MAGNET b CLUTCH MFI CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision I ...

Page 145: ...145 NOTES ...

Page 146: ... DOHC MFI CIRCUIT DOHC From 1991 models A 08 ER IGNITION SWITCHGT T C OR z A 41 12 z 69 3 cl A 09 3 1 gig MFI 1 I 3 1 id z Eig 107 6 3_ Z e 56 r 7 EExPUMP CONNECTOR M T A T A VT I s Al agiyj fl 3 I I Ne J_oiL _ d rY 3 4 Y TSB Revision ...

Page 147: ...MFI Circuit DOHC IGN SW1 2I ON 1 IGl 2 BW 7 C 08 T CONDENSER z AWD ci d 10 IGNITION COIL B 07 I 2 El 3 I IGNITION 7 2 3 POWER TRANSISTOR 5 m B 09 ii g n f Fj EJ C 52 ENGINE SPEED DETECTION CONNECTOR J B 8 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 148: ...ls Turbo MFI RELAY d Y IY 12 YOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR n nlA e x VOLUM rLYPePI Re 11x lLOV REYBOR RLNROR B 22 5 1 4 m I IA 3 c u _2_2_ 21 1 TROL UNIT V 8 5V 5v 64 Y 5v 5V d T I I t i II I I 7 I 1 1 iI Ii I ENGINE COOI ANT M ATURE L KNOCK I SENSOR B 04 3 ACTOR El c 14 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 149: ... EVAPORATIVE MOTOR EMISSION 2 ijf OID B 03 I I I 6 E 57 G I 4 A 56 I B e P 38 a z POWER STEERING yFXs RE i URBOCHAKER fASTE GATE SOLENOID I ENG DATA FRONT SIDE 2 F Ei I d 5 2 l IGNITION TIMING ADJU9TMENT CONNECTOR B 04 ml A 61 ml gg S EMERATURE VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 150: ...Q EGH A 48 SOLENOID IEJI VHEICLES FOR CAI ZRiiiA I A l 1 FUSIBLE LINI P A 07 2X 3 BB 234 IOD OR 3 GTORAGE CONNECTOR 2 A 07X I Q AUTO COMPRESSOR CtROL UNIT I DEDICATED 12v I c 30 FUSE p7izRq i c 57 pc 23 G 2 DUAL PRESSURE r SW TCH 8 pyPa J A 2l oF i 8gS PmPa RELAY BATTERY BACK UP G I I MAGNETIC CLUTCH MFI CONTROL UNIT KX35 AC H0538B NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 151: ...M Turbocharger waste gate solenoid X Evaporative emission purge solenoid I P Fuel pressure solenoid Vehicle speed sensor reed switch W Y Fuel pump check terminal Heated oxygen sensor T Volume air flow sensor incorporating intake air temperature sensor and barometric pres B sure sensor A NOTE The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order TSB Revision I ...

Page 152: ...152 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC Heated oxygen sensor temperature sen mod 1 I r m 4 I lgnttlon cot1 Ignition W Dower transistor TSB Revision ...

Page 153: ...ClRCUlT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC 153 m F r o m 1 9 9 0 m o d e l s I I ii Ignition coil ignition power transistor sensor and camshaft 2 tII 3Kc y Air conditioning _ __ swifch TSB Revision ...

Page 154: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MFI Circuit DOHC Vehicle speed sensor check terkinal _ _M control module 1610411 pressure switch _ 6Fuo6o3 Turbocharger I II l Flib844 TSB Revision ...

Page 155: ...n Turbo FWD AWD M T IGNITION SWITCH IG2 AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT ONDENSER fTAN MOTOR 4 I z CL CL s GY 4 GY 0 0 THERM0 SENSOR ON 65 C 165 F OFF 78 C 172 F 0N lBOOkPa 256 s I I 0FF lSOOkPa 5 G 13DSi 2 B I I I Remark DOHC from 1992 models 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 156: ...OTOR A 25 9 P IX I x 1 2 CONDENSER FAN MOTOR RELAYtHI O N t a A 1 0N lBOOkPa 256PS I OFP 1500kPa g 213Osi 1 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RELAYtHI 1 2 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR Es RELAYCLO E 3 I 3 CONDENSER FAN MOTOR ks RELAYtLO 0 1 d A 29 RESISTOR E AToR OFF 2N I RESISTOR ONENSER A 24 e Ei 34 ON OFF W C OFF ON l02 C a Rema r I X From 1992 model 3 E TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 157: ...t 157 COMPONENT LOCATION I Name 1 Condenser fan motor relay HI Symbol Name Symbol 1 A t Radiator fan motor relay HI I B 1 Condenser fan motor relay LO A Radiator fan motor relay LO Vehicles with an air conditioning I3 TSB Revision I ...

Page 158: ...AXLE CIRCUIT 1989 MODELS 1GNITION WCH IGN SWI IG A OS 10 E 1 P _______ 10 COMBJNATIDN METER ii 1OA PARK NEUTRAL L14 BY q 16 1 BY I I I 119 r I Y I3 I F3w E Y Y YB 114 YB 6 YR 5 YR YB j YR RG RG 3 I GL 1 GL j I GR GR 0 BY 2 d CL 7 v BACK UP LIGHT STARTER MOTOR KS AC H0707 NY 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 159: ... SW1 IG LB D 44 A RG 9 GL r g GR I II ____ 1 J I I IGHT F D 47 I23 m 4 5 6 POWER ECONOMY OVER zc L 1 J B TAIL I 11 POWER SUPPLY I RG 17 ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMPTiC p hE MODULE REMARK OMARK INDICATES THE OPTIONAL WIRING HARNESS FOR AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 160: ...SAXLE i CIRCUIT CONTINUED 1989 models ELC4 SPEED AUTOb ATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE 3N 2 OC kPa 298ES DFF 2 700kPa 384Ds i II rL7 IGNITION COIL A 08 6 W I T H AUTO Bj 2 c Y m G t CL ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID VALVE TO AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT KXJS AC HOvO A NY TSB Revision ...

Page 161: ... RHEO c 12 MFI CONTROL UNIT I RHEOSTAT E 01 19 m IBLE 2 7 m t El 1 C 36 1 J B 10A THROTTLE N E ON A 55 3 C 42 pi7f iq 60 I a A 45 fyy O p3sq 1 KICKDOWN SERVO SW1 A 44 ta REMARK XMARK INDICATES THE OPTIONAL WIRING HARNESS FOR AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM TSB Revision I ...

Page 162: ...TION RCH I C 24 A 41 7 ___ __ __ __ 10A f i 16 A 09 1 f CL ll __ __ __ 8 2 t Sk4 I 1 I ________ __ 7 l 7 1 i I I ______ _ _ _ I 5 10 iM NATION Liii BY m BY 16 BY RL 7 RL I 1 II Ri 1 BW 115 BW I 1 fc Y III BW I Y IB 1 1 I 1 YR 1 I l 3 i RG RG 1 II GL 12 I GR tGL j I GR 0 _ _ BACK UP LIGHT X35 AC H0708 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 163: ...EL c 01 WITH 515 4 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT I Pm UJ YR I RG GL tGR1 8 I I I I I I I 5 C 16 IGHT D 47 POWER ECONOMY CHANGE OVER SWITCH 1 J B TAIL 1 I ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATiC EXoLLE MODULE REMARK SMARK INDICATES THE OPTIONAL WIRING HARNESS FOR AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM TSB Revision ...

Page 164: ...els c 58 p4 xlmq ELC4 SPEED 4l t BLEc CONTROL MODULE FRONT SIDE 1 REVERSE SIDE p lzLlq C 18 C 23 8 t 6 ON 235kPa 33 4DSl fl A 21 ON 2300kPa 293Psl OFF 2700kPa 384PSl IGNITII TRANSIl OEOWER 3 1 B 06 B g A 08 6 63 T T 7 r ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID VALVE CRUISE CONTROL UNIT KX35 AC H0708A NW 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 165: ...saxle Circuit 165 c 12 MFI CONTROL UNIT 4 x RHEOSTAT 4 G 3 SUB FU IBLE LINK 1 d T Ei E 01 a ILL w2 ml I J B GROUND J B SERVO SWITCH EEUkE ATOI A 45 q REMARK tMARK INDICATES THE OPTIONAL WIRING HARNESS FOR AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM TSB Revision ...

Page 166: ...1 I igo BY BY 16 I I RL I7 1 RL I BY j RL BW 115 I RW 9 Y 16 Y I I E YB 114 YB B YR 15 YR _ YR g IGNITION rCH I IGNITION TETFH A 08 IO I7_______ _ _ 1 f d if 6 t m LB o I I w I I I I I RG I LW4 I GL 8 I GR GR A I 0 I 4 I J _ NATION METER 0 BY 62 2i ti cl 1 1 BACK UP LIGHT STARTER MOTOR K35 AC H0710 NM 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 167: ...rcuit 167 IGNITION YESFH 10A c 01 W I T H 5T51 RG GL I GR 1 BWATED D 47 POWER ECONOMY gfIfIg OVER Ef 1 J B TAIL rr C 60 1 ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATIC EiF ELE MODULE REMARK XMARK INDICATES THE OPTIONAL WIRING HARNESS FOR AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM TSB Revision ...

Page 168: ...els FROM SIDE p lzFq REVERGE 61 DE ELCX SPEED a C MODULE __ 168 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ELC 4 Speed Automatic Transaxle Circuit I C 57 iRaq ON 235kPa 33 4PSI OFF 210kPa 26 6PSl OFF 2700kPa 384osl KICKDOWN SERVO SWITCH CRUISE CONTROL q UNIT KX35 AC H0710kNY TSB Revision ...

Page 169: ...T E 01 m IGNITION POWER TRANSISTOR I 5 GiND V 5 1 ______ 64 67 m a s I I Li I I m t El 2 m p7EiEEqc 32m l6 J B B 06 I 3 12 C 38 4 El a4 9 T cu 113 6 I ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID VALVE PULSE GENERATOR A 45 REMARK xMARK INDICATES THE OPTIONAL WIRING HARNESS FOR AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM TSB Revision ...

Page 170: ...4 G CL A 41 A 09 _____________ __ _ T l d 4 BY 16 BY c10 17 I RL I 1 I I I BY RL 9 115 I BW I I RL BW Y 6 1 Y 1 i 1 BW Y CYB 14 1 YB t 1 YB _ 0 0 I YR 1 YH G RG GL 1r I IfXl IGR P __ __ ____ 5 10 yE NATION iz A O 4 I __ _______________ __ t _ 0s m v 2 i z _ 0 s BY 63 2 Al v v BACK UP LIGHT STARTER MOTOR E3 KX35 AC H0 13 NM TSB Revision ...

Page 171: ... Transaxle Circuit m jiil t j4 T l 4 2 zi 3 c 3 c I I I I IGHT I 1 PWATED 8 C 32 D 47 POWER ECONOMY CHANGE OVER SWITCH IO 2 d 1 J C TAIL C 60 1 Remark Zmark inoicates tne optional wirin harness for AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SfSTEM 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 172: ...VERSE SIDE A56 __ ____ T ELC 4SPEED AUTOMATIC C AJW LE vo_D_u_L_E t GEt f I 10 13 C 58 E g 55 58 ______ _ ___ __ i b5v _________ __ I1 __ 84 a IG I I m L A5 F h I g c 50 COMBINATION METER Ei z AUTOMAT1 C TRANSAXLE TURE 1 l A 46 ml 2 W I T H AUTO CR JISS CONTROL I A 1 BrR 3 8 62 JUMPER CONNECTOR x 01 UNIT xX35 AC H0714A NW T AUTO CONTROL J B L FWD _ e m SERVO SWITCH 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 173: ... SWITCHtIGl J B DIODE c 47 1 2 RHEOSTAT r E 01 J C RHEO J B I113 60 l E q IIllln Ml ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID VALVE L AWD I Remarks tmark indicates the optioqaL wiring _ _ _ h a r n e s s f o r a u t o c r u i s e c o n t r o l SYStem g i E TSB Revision I ...

Page 174: ...UIT From 1993 models E 52 r Ir 7 I C 24 A 41 A 09 m 1OA Q 16 1 25 LB D D DFF Ill464 BY 16 BY I I nr IrJ I RL BY an RL BW 3 BW 8 Y 0 Itl A14 Yd fR 5 YR _ YB 6 YR a3 E RG I GL P I I GR Ir 3 j A 3 L __ 10 COMBINATION A 09 g METER J 1 2 t i z s BY 63 2 CL 7 BACK UP LIGHT STARTER MOTOR 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 175: ...I I I BW y I YR I I I I I I RG GL 1 g GR IF3 t i _ _ __ I y GHT BY I I J B 0 C 32 D 47 POWEiR ECONOMY CHANGE OVER SWITCH 1 J C TAIL l T I GR 50iG RW 57 I ELC 4SPEED AUTOMATIC k LE MODULE Remark tmark i n d i c a t e s t h e optional w i r i n g h a r n e s s f o r a u t o c r u i s e Control SYStem TSB Revision ...

Page 176: ...3 models nATA l lNK ELC4 SPEED 4HHLi 5 CONTROL MODULE Y I a CONNECTOR El AUTO COMPRESSOR CONTROL UNIT ON 235kPa 33 4DSl OFF 210kPa 2Q QPsl ON 2100kPa 288Psl OFF 2700kPa 384Pal FFtCINT SIDE b RE IOD OR STORAGE CONNECTOR V 1 ______________ ____ c 59 7 COMBINATION METER J B KICKDOWN SERVO SWITCH KX35 AC H0715A NM 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 177: ...atic Transaxle Circuit 177 1 J C OVER DRIYE IL SWITCH E c 12 MFI CONTROL UNIT 5V m J 1 2 I 3 RHEOSTAT E 01 m I q I L L I AA A lllfi22yl17 yl I 2 I m J B GROUND 33 C 60 _ _ v ELC 4 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID VALVE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 178: ...A 4 A T control module H Pulse generator B MFI control module I Solenoid valve Oil temperature sensor D Throttle position sensor Power PWR Economy ECO switch G Vehicle speed sensor NOTE The Name column IS arranged in alphabetical order C and D are built into the transaxle From 1991 models Symbol A A C B E a I c 09AOO51 q 0 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 179: ...Deed Automatic Transaxle Circuit rott e positlon i control module L 16AO495 Soeedometer Vetkle speed sensor 16A005 I 989 models Power PWR Economy ECO switch A0463 From 1990 models Power PWR Economy ECO switch 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 180: ...1989 MODELS IGNITION SW TCH IG1 SUB FUSIBLE LINK 0 0 J B 1 10A 10A _ ___________ 3 s 1 m 2 c 74x H 34 SEAT BELT TIMER COMEiNATION METER s 0 5 2 SEAT BELT 1 SWITCH DF8 iON 1 D 43 B F E 14 C 16 D 33 FRONTDOOR SWITCH LEFT SIDE X35 AC HOB31 NM TSB Revision J ...

Page 181: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Buzzer Circuit 181 COMPONENT LOCATION Name Symbol Seat belt timer A TSB Revision ...

Page 182: ...EFT SIDE R I G H T SIDE NE TOUCK DOWN CIRCVIT CiJ FRONT POWER WINDOW g2 MAIN SWITCY I I3 I j i I I I E l 2 j 9 14 4 m A z 411 5 Q mun Q __ ______ __ ___ _ _i __ J B C 38 I 2 El3 34 m CL 3 I T L u n FRONT WINDOW MOTER 35 AC HllYS NY LEFT SIDE REAR POWER I yUJfl SUB bff fiiT SIDE 1 2 El33 345 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 183: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Power Window Circuit Vehicles without ETACS I83 WINDOW REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE I I FRONT POWER I WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE I TSB Revision ...

Page 184: ... 1990 models ONE TOUC 30WN CIRCU T r FRONT POWER WINDOW MA I N SW TC FRONT REAR LEFT SIX X G iT flD k Y JDOWN pq I r I UPi OWN I 2 r 9 I FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTER KXJS AC HYIYG NY LEFT SIDE I f f i rZEl D 17 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 185: ...out ETACS 185 pR C WINDOW C 72X El 34 __ _ __ REAR F R O N T LEFT 31 DE1 mIGBT sioe UP DOWN UP DOW1 I I 1 IJ B C X 12 I3 34 FRONT POWER iVVIdydf SUB I 3 m D 11 345 D 30 FRONT F OW R WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 186: ...hout ETACS From 1991 models L FRONT REAR L E F T GIDE R I G H T SIDE ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT t t 3 J up A DOWN up A ADOWN FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTER LEFT SIDE LKX35 AC Hl125 NY J B C 38 m cl 33 4 RIGHT SIDE D 18 1 2 Em 846 1 D 17 i REAR WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 187: ... without ETACS 787 SUB FU IBLE LINK 2 d IU TIDN SWITCH I i a REAR POWER ym SUB LEFTD_S E I 2 El 306 qg6 22 913 G 1 8 j 3 b 5 II bo _ __ 1 8 T D 3 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE fT zm c 4 r 1J B TSB Revision I ...

Page 188: ...es with ETACS 1989 models FRONT REAR L E F T SIDE R I G H T SIDE ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT D 36 tYCL 1 t1 M D 38 t FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH KX J B C 38 I 2 EDI 34 IS AC HllY7 NY FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTER LEFT SIDE Y cu 3 4 cu 4 6 I I REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE D 17 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 189: ... pili mq REVERSE SIDE fRi iy DATA LINK CONNECTOR FRONT DOOR LIGHT T F zl 2 D 24 ii2 F R ON 7 w 2 13 I G 1 6 da A 3 A8 CL 10 _ _ _ _ _ ST A 5 _ _ _ _ _ a 1 FRONT POWER i IW SUB D 11 1 2 m 346 D 05 D 33 C OFi y HDOOR FRONT DOOR SWITCH LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 190: ...MAIN SWITCH 36 35 AC HllYB NY ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT FRONT LEFT SIDE P DOWN I REAR RIGHT SIDE UP DOWN I D 38 r9 q4 4 11 j L 3 2 5 CD CL J 3 3 cu pDgq J B C 38 m CL 3 I 4 cp cu REAR POWER WINDOW SUB SWITCH RIGHT SIDE D 18 1 2 m a45 I D 17 E l 1 I FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTER LEFT SIDE 0 REAR POWER WI NLIOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 191: ... a I 3 4 I J B C 36 L 0 YOA C 42 _ D 30 r I 2 ii 28 ____ __ D 05 C 4 OF9 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE FRDNTR WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE 1 E 6 IGNITION FH 7 c 39 m D 33 ETACS CONTROL UNIT REVERSE SIDE pR q FRONT DOOR LIGHT D 24 I DOOR FRONT DOOR SWITCH LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 192: ...IRCUIT Vehicles with ETACS From 1991 models Non Turbo ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT 36 FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH D 38 FRONT REAR LEFT 61DE RIGHT 61DE m CL 3 J B C 38 __ 0 m 1 r h Fiiiiixs WINDOW MOTOR 1 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR as AC H1129 NM LEFT SIDE RIGfiT SIDE 1 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 193: ...uit Vehicles with ETACS 193 C 72X v m qr6 13 c 1 ifi2 268 22 i 3 8 5 J 10 _ _ c __ _ SWITCH IG1 _ ____ _ ETACS SkYTRO I REAR POWER FRDNTR WINDOW MOTOR WINDOW MOTOR iyf2HDOOR F HDOOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 194: ...CIRCUIT Vehicles with ETACS From 1991 models Turbo FRONT REAR ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT LEFT 61OE P DOWN R I G H T SIDE UP DOWN 36 FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH c C J B C 38 F R O N T WINDOW MOTOR nl I c3 KEAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR KX35 AC Hll30 NY LEFT SIDE TSB Revision RIGHT SIDE ...

Page 195: ... i cl a REAR FRONT LEFT BIDE RIGHT SIDE UP DOWN LIP DOWN I I c3 GNO V 5 I DATA LINK CONNECTOR DIODE 3 C 46 2 5 mz m 2 D 33 1t2 D 24 3N I rTC FT iHDO R iiDO R SIDE RIGHT SIDE 6 13 51 B G 5 id 2l li 3 A 10 ___ _ 8 A __ 5 AJ CD j D 30 D 05 BRiBO E OR FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 196: ...196 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Power Window Circuit 4Vehicles with ETACS COMPONENT LOCATION Name Symbol Name Symbol ETACS control unit A Power window relay B TSB Revision ...

Page 197: ...990 models TI TCF TAILLIGHT RELAY I fK FvlBLE J B 101 J C 3 BW iG CONTROL PANEL G ILLUMINATION AL rd J C I c2 m4 I z RHEO cp Dar m c i gj G d 73 2 7 p I T 4 k3 E 01 C 53 ILL pmg RHEOSTAT I m2 J C GROUND C 32 mi J B C 38 tG 4 CL n 35AC Hl237 NY TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 198: ...198 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Heater Circuit HEATER CIRCUIT From 1991 models TAILLIGHT RELAY tY F BLE 17 J C TAIL E 01 m RHEOSTAT J C GROUND d J B 3 c 44 4 OFF I 5 f CY n 6 35 AC lil340 NN q TSB Revision ...

Page 199: ...Air Conditioning Circuit 199 _ AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT 1989 MODELS TAILLIGHT RELAY TmfF T I 10A 4 l 44 C 33 1 I J C TAIL J C 3 u RHEO 4 3 I RgY I d 2 J C GROUND C 38 I m4 CL X35 AC HY235 NY J B LR c OFF 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 200: ...DiCATED 2 I R cu CONDENSEH FAN MOTOR m cl 6 41 I 2 z a d 3 A 03X A 04X 3 4 3 o 3 A 26 A 25 3 4 RADIATOR r CONDENSER A YoToR LO K A oToR HI I I I 1 1 2 1 2 2 m I Lh i 63 I d RADIATOR FAN MOTOR THERM0 SENSOR ON 85 C 185 F OFF 78 C 372 F A 29 SEDE RESISTOR A 24 g FJF RE ON 1800kPa 256 s i 1 OFF l500kPa 213 s i A 15 1 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 201: ...T DIAGRAMS Air Conditioning Circuit 201 SUB LIN1 C 23 7IBLE GY 8 AUTO COMPRESSOR KERoL 5 I A 07X lii J 5 3 m m s 1 m AI I ZDITIONING fmsb l 1 R d REFRIGERANT THERM Ts Ef AT R SENSOK 0 B 05 C 28 c 29 TSB Revision ...

Page 202: ...Circuit 1 AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT 1990 MODELS Y FyIBLE IGNI TAILLIGHT RELAY SWIT I L KX ti CATED 30A c 37 5 a s 0 7 c lC 36 r CONDITIONING 1 J C TAIL 2iI J C RHEO J C c 38 I 2 1831 I m4 34 CL d G2 2 LR J B LR 1 5 1 T z c 3 3 TSB Revision I ...

Page 203: ... LINI 7 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2 3 ci Ad ffl 34 d 4 3 A 03X 8 OFF JOY I 3 1 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR THERM0 SENSOR IBLE 5 2 BR 1 A 29 ON a5 C 185 F OFF 78 C 172 F CONDENSER MBT8 A 24 I 2 El a4 ON 1800kPa 256 s i 1 OFF 1500kPa 2 13Ps i 1 I A 15 KXXi AC HY2sBA WY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 204: ...NUED SUB 1 LINK 8 IBLE J III IIIIIII iw ATED C 27 1 2 Ed3 a456 AIR C DD ON 3 1OA 2 i 5 m z2 7 2 a lit_lgm 1 C 23 o GY _ GY 12 Q GY I ON 235kPa 33 4PS 2 ON 2100kpa B 05 c 28 I SOHC DOHC IGR ON 109 C 228 F 1 i 1 ELC 4 SPEEDg OFF 115 C iii 8ZR xTLEc 239 F L a 7 m 6 5 i ROL UNIT 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 205: ... Conditioning Circuit 1 AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT From 1991 models 205 Non Turbo FWD AWD M T TAILLIGHT RELAY FylBLE IGNI7 SWITC r 1 J C TAIL 4 5x3 RHEOSTAT I 1 E 01 l 2 IN IG2 2 LR 1 J B LR 1 XX35 C H1241 NN q TSB Revision ...

Page 206: ... Turbo FVVD AWD M T IGNITION S ZFH SUB F IBLE LINK 6 i 2 BR m c A 29 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR THERM0 SENSOR ON 85 C 185 F OFF 78 C 172 F N I I I GY o I GY 8 I 9 fl Remarks A DOHC From 1992 models LB GOHC From 1993 models CONDENSER FAN MOTOR y lx 4 3wP ON 1800kPa 256 s i 1 OFF 1500koa 213 s i A 15 TSB Revision ...

Page 207: ...23 5 ON 235kPa 33 4D S i 1 OFF 2lOkPa 29 QDS I ON 21OOkDa 298ps i 1 OFF 2i OOkDa 384 s I 3 IBLE I I I GY 6 GY k 6 5 I I I g 4 c 57 5 12 _ 2 41 I I I C 27 rrl I m m AIR CONDITIONING A R INLET A1R REFRIGERANT SENSOR TEMF ERATURE ml A SENSOR ii B 05 c 20 c 29 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 208: ...rcuit r AIR CONDITIONING CIRCUIT From 1991 models Non Turbo AWD A T Turbo TAILLIGHT RELAY SWITC I IG2 f FylBLE IGNITlON KX3 l 44 c 33 1 2 I3 34 t3 2 I AA L n n RHEOSTAT ILL m 1 E 01 m2 C 38 1 2 la Y m4 34 ci J B l5 AC H1242 NY q TSB Revision ...

Page 209: ...OR FAN MOTOR RESISTOR L THERM0 S NSOR k ON 85 C 185 F I OFF 78 C 172 F TEMPERATURE Remark tA DOHC From 1992 models KXS AC HlZ44A NY IBLE s 2 BR I A 29 5 c A 29 1 i CONDENSER FAN MOTOR RESISTOR A 24 3 m I 2 L cl i cl 3 3N 1 P I GY o I CONDENSER FAN MOTOR EY RMF ON 1800k a 2561 i OFF 1500kPa 213 s i A 15 GB 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 210: ... SUB1 LINK B g 1OA C 23 a GY GY 12 I ON 235ltDa 33 413s i 1 Om 210kDa 29 9Ds i ON 2100kPa 298Ps i 1 OFF 2 i OOkDa 384 i 1 IBLE 3 T 1 C 27 2 4 5 MODULE MFI CONTROL UNIT jJ ____ TjJTY E m mrb 1 3 2 __ UCI up g 21 21 DITIONING AIR INLET f mo REFRIGERANT SENSOR A TEMPERATURE SENSOR SENSOR B 05 C 28 6 c 29 Remarks S SOHC From 1993 models TSB Revision ...

Page 211: ...lay LO HI Symbol A H E G F C NOTE The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order 4 q Radiator fan motor relay LO v compressor Name Symbol Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch for compressor magnetic clutch D Engine coolant temperature switch for radiator fan motor D Radiator fan motor relay LO Hi A Refrigerant temperature sensor B Heater relay I 2OAO328 Up to 1992 models 1 radiato...

Page 212: ...212 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Air Conditioning Circuit 20A0260 Air therm0 s Evaporator 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 213: ...213 NOTES ...

Page 214: ...uit Vehicles without ETACS CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING CIRCUIT Vehicles without ETACS 1989 models SUB FU IBLE LINK 1 6 a fB l C 36 J B 0 15A L L I 3 12 10 c 40 lx I AC HllW I DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT c 02 I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision I ...

Page 215: ...ing Circuit Vehicles without ETACS DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT RELAY 7 A Y Q I II c F 7 5 C I FRONT DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE D 32 F7zmj 4 t 1 4 TSB Revision ...

Page 216: ...lACS CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING CIRCUIT Vehicles without ETACS 1990 models SUB FU IBLE LINK 1 d a C 36 a J B I I Lo 3 DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT c 02 2 r POWER RELAY J B I I C 38 1 e 1831 4 34 7 m FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE D 39 p Tigaq D 34 l5 AC HI 1 JET NY TSB Revision ...

Page 217: ...king Circuit Vehicles without ETACS 217 DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT yLOCK Q 3 7 I s c i 7 I I c i 2 I 2 13 i D 20 J 1 I I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE REAR DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 218: ...icles without ETACS CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING CIRCUIT Vehicles without ETACS From 1991 models A 07 2X O 2 7 r li stil 1234 UNLOCK LOCK J B L RKBYLoCK c 73x 3 1 DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT c 02 m CGI F R O N T DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE 35 AC HllJl NM TSB Revision ...

Page 219: ...king Circuit Vehicles without ETACS 219 DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT ETYLoCK 0 3 13 1 2 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE cl D 16 I 1 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT 6IDt 2 3 4 I tz I 3 1 D 23 r REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 220: ...TACS CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING CIRCUIT Vehicles with ETACS 1989 models a B I C 36 _ 0 15A AL I3 z l i 10 c 40 7 r p zazq z 2 O2 7 ETACS CONTROL UNIT r FRONT SIDE Fi iq REVERSE SIDE POWER RELAY 1 2 i 3 D 39 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE K35 AC H1113 NY TSB Revision 7 ...

Page 221: ...tral Door Locking Circuit Vehicles with ETACS 221 ETACS CONTROL UNIT DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ARXA RIGHT SIDE RIGHT 8 LoCK SIDE ETACS CONTROL UNIT v REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 222: ...ehicles with ETACS7 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING CIRCUIT d Vehicles with ETACS 1990 models ETACS CONTROL UNIT r 2 1 9 T L4 C 18 FRONT SIDE pil iiq REVERSE SIDE f FfR q T KSJ AC H1114 NY GND iI 3 I 30 22 I 3 D 39 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 223: ...ETACS DOOR LOCK CONTROL POWER RELAY UNIT 7h G mt 51 w 2 4 3 l D 14 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR REAR DOOR LOCK RIGHT SIDE ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE ETACS CONTROL UNIT 77 FRONT DOOR SWITCH 2 LEFT SIDE D 33 RI D 23 D 32 Ei 234 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE FS CONTROL TSB Revision ...

Page 224: ...th ETACS From 1991 models Non Turbo B 1C 36 J B 0 0 IOA 15A m c 37 l 1 L 25 1 ez 12 10 c 40 I iii mi kz 100 OR STORAGE CONNECTOR A 07 2X Ia 134 1 DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY c 73x c 04 6 29 3 m J B I9 43 w5 DATA LINK CONNECTOR 13 D 39 I D 34 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE j 1 9 L K K35 AC H1132 NM TSB Revision I ...

Page 225: ...LOCK CONTROL POWER RELAY UNIT I A A D 02 4 5 mt 3lW 2 4 3 Al D 14 P FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE I REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE D 23 D 32 li l 234 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE fFS CONTROL T E88fJT LIGHT g 0 F FRONT I PB 8 CH 522 RIGHT SIDE D 24 J lm 3 g TSB Revision ...

Page 226: ... CIRCUIT Vehicles with ETACS 1991 and 1992 models Turbo J B J 10A m c 37 l 1 c J tea4 lF 10 C 40 E 1 1 CL 22 IOD OR r l 4 STORAGE CONNECTOR DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY ETACS CONTROL UNIT DATA LINK CONMXXJR FRONT SIDE izz Rq REVERSE SIDE m Im 16 D 39 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 227: ...es with ETACS 227 I J I I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR REAR DOOR LOCK RIGHT SIDE ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE ETACS CONTROL UNIT DIODE C 46 2 r D 23 D 32 lii Eil 1234 7 I FRONT DOOR LIGHT I I I REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE E88F LIGHT I zr RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 228: ...228 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Central Door Locking Circuit COMPONENT LOCATION Name Door lock control unit SOHC Door lock relay Symbol Name Symbol A ETACS control unit DOHC A B TSB Revision ...

Page 229: ...GNITION J B WN SWITCH NTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY I COL IN CARE OF OPERATION t n INTERBAI FIXED TYPE INTERMITTEN WIPER VARIABLE INTERMITTENT jl l HCONTROI _ 5 1 3 5 2 3 s 2 12 C OS I 1234 m 5676 5 3 z I 7 Liii 1 I m WIPER MOTOR 35 AC H1324 NM Remark inUicates v e h i c l e s w i t h v a r i a b l e i n t e r m i t t e n t wiper TSB Revision ...

Page 230: ...S WIPER AND WASHER CIRCUIT Vehicles with ETACS Up to 1990 models IGNITIoN ITCH lACC 4 6 FRONT SIDE fzi Rq REVERSE S I DE 61 t C 08 1234 iz m 5675 d WIPER ETACS UNIT j C 08 YW 9 11 Y j 3 COLUMN SWITCH ___ I WAGHER BWITCH I 6LOW FAST 2 B 135 AC H1325 NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 231: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS w per and Washer Circuit Vehicles with ETACS 231 WASHER SWITCH c 09 mIc C 08 n i C i WIPER SWITCH WIPER RELAY r WIPER P l A g 34 MOTOR TSB Revision ...

Page 232: ...c 38 1 STORAGE 1 CONNECTOR it C 08 5 FRONT SIDE mi J B d REVERSE SIDE J cl A _ al c 44 10 O 6 I I WIPER RELAY __ _ ETACS UNIT l5a Y I 23 c 7 Y j C 08 234 m 5675 IT A 1 r GND GNO 1 c 43 234 IlzB 5876 j d I z 7 d ___ I c 40 p 1 c 18 3 COLUMN SWITCH ___ c I ______ ______ _ __ _ _ 13 C 69 m I X35 AC H1334 Nu 2 B 1 _ Remark Eiv Z m a r k i n d i c a t e s venicles w i thout THEFT ALARM SYSTEM TSB Revis...

Page 233: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Wiper and Washer Circuit Vehicles with ETACS 233 WIPER SWITCH r h Ez L I c 09 3 0 1 E 2 77 L 1 1 h El a 2 1 WIPER MOTOR A 52 m t 2 34 TSB Revision ...

Page 234: ...234 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Wiper and Washer Circuit COMPONENT LOCATION Name ETACS control unit Symbol Name Symbol B Wiper relay A 3 07AOO35 I MAO408 TSB Revision ...

Page 235: ...ote Controlled Mirror Circuit REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR CIRCUIT 1989 models IGNITION WH J B al J I4 g U CONTROLLED MIRROR D 48 KX36 AC H1306 N I I L Y L LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE D 02 D 08 pj REMOTE CONiROL MIRROR TSB Revision J ...

Page 236: ...Mirror Circuit REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR CIRCUIT 1990 models IGNITION WFFH J B CONTROLLED MIRROR D 48 7 r I I v 7 a 3 2 9 6 m F 0 cp 0 cu F J 5 F z A D 41 D 08 JTJ j LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE REMOTE CONtROL MIRROR iKX35 AC H1323 NM I TSB Revision ...

Page 237: ...S Remote Controlled Mirror Circuit 237 From 1991 models IGNITION SWITCHtACC T I III L I LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE c J REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR Remark Mark indicates vehicles with THEFT ALARM SYSTEM 35 AC H1330 NW TSB Revision ...

Page 238: ...cuit Vehicles without ETACS SUNROOF CIRCUIT Vehicles without ETACS Up to 1990 models IGNITION SUB SWITCX IG2 LINK I 1234 ml 56 3 C 43 J B 0 1OA 2 L 2 r IBLE 3 1 DEDICATED FUSE 1 C 36 fi LIGHT v J C 35 i iq S AC Hl427 NY TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 239: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Sunroof Circuit Vehicles without ETACS J B SUNROOF POWER RELAY r TSB Revision I SUNROOF SW1 TCH LIMIT SWITCH DOME LIGHT D 09 D 06 TiTEq SUNROOF MOTOR D 07 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 ...

Page 240: ...SUNROOF CIRCUIT Vehicles without ETACS From 1991 models m I cl IGNITION SWITCH IG2 r _ __ _ _ _ s D 38 1 1 C D I O D E 2 2 I L z c 3 u J 63 2OP I c c 1 UC 6 T DEDICATED c FUSE r11 1 C 36 B ___ _ IGHT 1234 c 37 lEEI 6676 I c 35 pi iq KX35 AC Hl435 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 241: ...AMS Sunroof Circuit Vehicles without ETACS 241 SUNROOF POWER RELAY 3 5 m I Ei 2 52 s 0 m LA N m I 3 5 l 1 r SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH SUNROOF MOTOR DOME LIGHT D 09 D 06 D 07 TSB Revision SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 ...

Page 242: ...TACS Up to 1990 models IGH IITCH IG1 SUB FUSIBLE LINK TAILL g G Lb C 11 a El I c 43 1 C 36 T RELAY IGNITION 3 iFATED 1234 BEI 6676 3 c 37 _I 2 c 35 pmq I C 42 ETACS CONTROL 2 UNIT _ 1 PC _ c i h ml D 33 L c 43 1234 I33 5670 a cl OF RIGH SIDE 7 FRONT DOOR SWITCH 35 AC ll1425 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 243: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Sunroof Circuit Vehicles with ETACS 243 SUNROOF Km v r SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH SUNROOF MOTOR DOME LIGHT D 09 D 06 D 07 pa Tq pimq I IQ 2 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 TSB Revision ...

Page 244: ...icles with ETACS From 1991 models Non Turbo IGNITION I J B r L IOA c 39 ETACS z TRoL h ITCH IGl SUB FUSIBLE LINK TAILLI l 0 20A8 ___ __ 7 33 2 s W T DOOR YW gpz J F 2 D 33 r 7 D 24 LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE I FRONT DOOR SWITCH REVERSE SIDE GHT RELAY i l X35 AC H1440 WY TSB Revision ...

Page 245: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Sunroof Circuit Vehicles with ETACS 245 J B 1 Tr2 SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH DOME LIGHT L I 1 SUNROOF MOTOR D 09 D 06 o 07 pm pzmq I ta 2 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 ...

Page 246: ...odels Turbo IGNITlOl J B TACS ONTROL NIT TCH IGl SUB FUSIBLE LINK TAILL 0 IOA8 0 20A8 I 3 IOD OR 5 1 STORAGE y y7 gR c X p 3 RELAY I 0 Q 1 _ _ __ __ 1 33 23 9 s a 1 1 WNNWI UK r L Ef SE 31DE IGHT RELAY z I z KFATED DA zso I33 i ee7e w 6 C 37 c 40 1J B c 43 FRONT DOOR SWITCH q X35 AC Hl442 3X TSB Revision ...

Page 247: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS sunroof Circuit Vehicles with ETACS J B SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH DOME LIGHT D 09 D 06 j Tmiq lO LYELAY i 4z Tr2 ELAY I TSB Revision SUNROOF MOTOR D 07 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 ...

Page 248: ...rcuit COMPONENT LOCATION Name Diode From 1991 models ETACS control unit Symbol Name Symbol B Sunroof control relay C A Sunroof power relay C From 1991 models TSB Revision Sunroof control relay w cE F i syc r l _ c Sunroof power relay ...

Page 249: ...Control Suspension ECS Circuit 249 KX3 ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENTION ECS CIRCUIT 1989 MODELS 14 RHEOSTAT E 01 r HEADL DEDICATED FUSE r G 10 I J C RHEO I J C 1 GROUND IT RELAY TAILLIGHT RELAY I V A V V n 5 AC H1535 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 250: ...CTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENS ION ECS CIRCUIT CONTINUED 1989 models IGNITION IGNITII SWITCH IG2 SWITCH I 3N SUE IGl lJ 7 BLE ACTIVE 1 F 17 A 41 i 1 I I IBACK UP ILIGHT SWITCH 1 IB 21 jm i Z 23 12 3 MINUTES OFF DELAY TIMER NIC CONTROL SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision I ...

Page 251: ...E El 34 W kON EA CTIVE r LECTRONIC CONTROL I 1 I V V 8 USPENSION ONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ACTIVE Electronic Control Suspension ECS Circuit 251 I I 1 I I I 1 I ACTIVE G 0 h ELECTRONIC CONTROL 5 2 3 SUSPENSION REAR HEIGHT SENSOR I I STEERING ANGULAR C 67 VELOCITY SENSOR COLUMN SWITCH KX35 AC tllSZM NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 252: ...y gM LE SPEED DlAGNOSIS SESRWV OUTPUT I MF UT GROUND I COMBINATION COMBINATION F 19 A A A V _____ ACTIVE c LE fi N lC SUSPENTION t ESOLENOID ggi RE xl NOISE FILTER G SENSOR A 23 I2 IQi 3 i NIC CONTROL A 27 SUSPENSION FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR F 15 x2 LOW PASS FILTER 3 AMPLIFICATION CIRCUIT 4 HALF WAVE RECTIFICATION CIRCUIT 5 OSCILLATION CIRCUIT TSB Revision ...

Page 253: ...ON A 40 IOF ACTIVE cL5 K N C SUSPENSION RETURN PUMP r A 37 I KX35 AC H1526B NN 3 0 ICTIVE LECTRONIC A ONTROL 6 ACTIVE y C J ELECTRONIC 3 3 s f tU 7 ON 4 3 77 SVALVE 5SOLENOID 4 RELAY A 06X ON OFF 1 I33 2 1 34 F 18 I A A v v V 6 ON 76OkPa 7 GkP cd 108psl OFF 950kPa B 5kO cm 135 31 TSB Revision ...

Page 254: ...UED 1989 models ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTOL SUSPENSION REAR ACTUATOR SUSPENSION FRONT ACTUATOR c I RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE X6REAR RIGHT GOLENOID VALVE ACTIVE IJNlC SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT XBFRONT INTAKE AIRm lOFRONT RIGHT 3PD d SOLENOID VALVE tQFRONT LEFT SOLENOID VALVE 6 TSB Revision ...

Page 255: ...ic Control Suspension ECS Circuit 255 GENERATOR 3 I 1 1 E G La ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT 5v P I VOLTAGE REQULATOR 1 FRONT DOOR SW KX35 AC HlSeBC NY TCH REAR DOOR SWITCH m f 82 7 I NG SWITCH 1 F 17 TSB Revision ...

Page 256: ... Control Suspension ECS Circuit ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION ECS CIRCUIT 1990 MODELS HEADL RHEOSTAT E 01 r c 32 r ILL I J C RHEO J C GROUND r i 6 3 m IT RELAY TAILLIGHT RELAY 0 IOA 3 58 C 37 J B 8 C 32 z r l J C TAIL 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 257: ...ension ECS Circuit 257 IGNITION IGNI SWITCH IG2 SWIT J B lOAb20Ab 101 80 86 76 F 17 10 1 7 1 1 ITCH BACK UP LIGHT SW B 21 a POWER I c A 41 f r I72 F 16 3 MINUTES DPF DELAY TIMER ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT I IBLE L TSB Revision ...

Page 258: ...ION ECS CIRCUIT CONTINUED 1990 models ACTIVE WX NIC SUSPENSION INDICATOR t RoL I c 12 5v II I I v E B 02 l THROTTLE kON 5 r I51 F 19 V V CTIVE LECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION t ONTROL UNIT OPEN CONNECTOR c 47 1 k3 2 IGHT STOP L SWITCH C 48 I i NIC SUSPENSION REAR HEIGHT SENSOR KX35 AC H1527A NY TSB Revision ...

Page 259: ...UTPUT yV HING GROUND I 5v 8 t 7 WFP _____ _ _ 54 55 56 711 h h 1 3 10 12 3 5 4 c 39 J B F _ 5 17 F 19 F 1 ACTIVE C L N C SUSPENTION j iEESOLENOID EISF tl NOISE FILTER A 23 ACTIVE A 27 J ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR F 15 Z 2 LOW PASS FILTER 3 AMPLIFICATION CIRCUIT x4 HALF WAVE RECTIFICATION CIRCUIT 5 OSCILLATION CIRCUIT G SENSOR p cu P H TSB Revision ...

Page 260: ...I BLE 1990 models f ACTIVE ELECTRONIC 7 gij ik I ON m 5 PUMP RELAY A 40 OFF 0 i 4 c YZTIVE ZLECTRONIC ZONTROL 1 ffl 2 1 34 cf S m ii3 C 06 ___ ___ _ _ p 22 34A 2 r __ OJ 6I m G Ef OFF DALA LO ON OkPa 0 7kWcd lOPsi 7 OFF 140kPa l 4kll cnfs20Psi c 3 HI ON 760kPa 7 6kWCti 1OBPsl 1 OFF Q50kPa Q 5kWcti 135Psi KX35 AC H152 7bNY TSB Revision I ...

Page 261: ...ATOR SUSPENSION FRONT ACTUATOR L A RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE F 05 pTi iq 1F 10 A 50 1 A 63 I I 1 I I I I II __ _ __ _ __ _____ A A A A I v v v v I X6 x X6REAR RIGHT Y C jOlD El r XSFRONT INTAKE AIRm XYOFRONT RIGHT BOLENOID d SOLENOID VALVE VALVE ZQFRONT LEFT SOLENOlD VALVE ACTIVE E f fNIC SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision ...

Page 262: ...LECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION ECS CIRCUIT CONTINUED 1990 models iIs3 k NIC CONTROL SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT f F 17 1 f I n m D 4 GENERATOF F 06 plz Iq I 4 5 1 Es 3D 22 CLEF SICE RIGHT S J Y REAR DOOR SWITCH CLEF SIEE RIGHT SIEEJ FRONT DOOR SWITCH KX35 AC H152 C NW I I TSB Revision ...

Page 263: ...on ECS Circuit 263 ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION ECS CIRCUIT From 1991 models IT RELAY TAILLIGHT RELAY HEADLT DEDICATED FUSE 0 10A 8 I J C TAIL s 1 J C RHEO 4 E z ILL RHEOSTAT E 01 m I J C GROUND m i m 1 pRlzEmq c 32 r 5 AC H1544 NM TSB Revision ...

Page 264: ...uit BLE ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION ECS CIRCUIT CONTINUED From 1991 models 88i IG2J IGNITION SUB FUC SWITCH IGl LINK 4 I I 63 0 10A J B 10A AL y8 c 37 I F 17 im n I E A i iN1 C CONTROL u SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT 3 MINUTES OFF E DELAY TIMBR s Gl 7 TSB Revision ...

Page 265: ...C CONTROL SUSPENSION INDICAI OR 0 liz izfmj B 02 1 THROTTLE g gpN i OPEN CONNECTOR J B STOP L SWITCH r I CTIVE LECTRONIC CONTROL j USPENSION ONTROL UNIT I I ACTIVE ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION REAR HEIGHT SENSOR STEERING ANGULAR C 67 VELOCITY SENSOR COLUMN SWITCH KX35 AC H1544h NY TSB Revision ...

Page 266: ...EED OUTPUT SibJHING GROUND II F 3 s 7 3 j 5 65 4 c 3g J B r h z c 50 COMBINATION METER 52 I F 19 58 c 40 J B C C 68 1 G SENSOR ACTIVE X NIC SUSPENTION X SOLENO EEpSSIlRF A 23 ID J ll L iSOR 1 NOISE FILTER 2 LOW PASS FILTER t3 AMPLIFICATION CIRCUIT 4 HALF WAVE RECTIFICATION CIRC I I J ACTIVE A 27 ELECTRONIC CONT T SUSPENSION FRO HEIGHT SENSOR 1 I VLI NT IT X5 OSCILLATION CIRCUIT TSR Revision I ...

Page 267: ...C z 3 k ION I COMP iEHVR A 39 OFF I I 23 iasl 4 5 4 1 CTIVET I LECTRONIC ONTROL 11 g 23 QQ 1 6 10 r J 3 MINUTES OFF DALAY TIMER kI I I I I FVE l ACTIVE ECS sl FLOW EXHAUST CONTROL A 28 SOLENOID pFLoyI VALVE VALVE VOLUME MREAR A 11 fWI EHING L E LO ON 70kPa O IkO Cnr lOPSl m OFF i4OkPe i 4kg c 20Dsi HI ON 760kPa 7 6kD cM 108Dsl OFF 95OkPa 9 5kO Cm 135DsI TSB Revision ...

Page 268: ...CUIT CONTINUED From 1991 models ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION REAR ACTUATOR ACTIVE ELECTRONIC CONTRDL SUSPENSIOIJ FRONT ACTUATOR WRIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE A 63 1 2 Ii33 3 4 ___ _ 1 II I I II I II II III lOFRONT RIGHT GOLENOID QFRONT LEFT ACTIVE aELE NIC SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 269: ...t 269 c 3 I j ENERATOR 1 q 3 16 ACTIVE ELECTRONiC CONTROL SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT 4 F 16 1 F 17 1 I 3 lm D 4 C OF F 06 WI TAGE YEGULATOR 1 LEFT SICE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE PARKING ERAKE SWITCH FRONT DO SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH KX35 AC Hl544GNN 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 270: ...lay ACTIVE ECS solenoid valve power relay A Rear actuator H B Rear height sensor J I I Q L I Rear pressure sensor Rear solenoid valve I I I 1 I I Exhaust solenoid valve for vehicle height adjustment Reserve tank incorporated within the return pump S Q Steering wheel angular velocity sensor G Flow control solenoid valve Front actuator Front height sensor Front solenoid valve R Stop light switch N C...

Page 271: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ACTIVE Electronic Control Suspension ECS Circuit 271 Front actuator solenoid valve 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 272: ...272 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ACTIVE Electronic Control Suspension ECS Circuit I 12A046 I xx 12AOI6 I TSB Revision Low pressure switch Reserve tank 12A0172 I ...

Page 273: ...273 NOTES ...

Page 274: ...S Circuit ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS ClRCUlT FWD 1989 models IGNITION SWITCH A 14 HYDRAULIC UNIT 18 v v V n 1 2 3 415l6l i6 1 0 1 Yo YY l Y3 rllslYsl7 VALVE RELAY IDIODE c 19 I C 26 IO 3 GOLENOID VALVE v v v v m ABS F 23 624 CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision ...

Page 275: ...RAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 275 y chIGHT ABS SPEED SENSOR c 47 A I FRONT LEFT SIDE R _G1HOT SIDE A 13 L a 1 i__ 3 0 w Bii2d I STOP LIGHT SWITCH Y i d 1 STOP LIGHT __ III I s 8 I m h9 I TSB Revision I ...

Page 276: ...CUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS CIRCUIT FWD 1990 models IGNITION SWITCH f I DIODE c 19 J I ra 70J l 4 m EiOLENOlD VALVE F 23 c 28 K X95 AC Hl529 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 277: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 277 ISE ABS SPEED SENSOR I A FRONT LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE A 13 A 10 I B I I A s I TSB Revision ...

Page 278: ... SYSTEM ABS CIRCUIT FWD 1991 models MAIN FUSIBLE MAIN FUSIBLE L I N K LINK IGNITION SWITCH IG2 IGl J 5 CL a 3 4 ABS POWER RELAY J AJ i c 21 N 1 2 2 ED 34 g I 11 J C 52 _w_7 GENERATOR IDIODE C 19 L4OTOR RELAY r SOLENOID VALVE 11 VALVE RELAY 2 F 23 X35 AC Hl548 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 279: ...CUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 279 OPEN CONNECTOR ABS SPEED SENSOR I FRONT L 3SIDE RAI_G SIDE m eiJ 2 STOP LIGHT SWITCH c 47 OFF ON 3 c 47 1 1 Q 2 h A A A Jl G D G D IGHT 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 280: ...i Lock Braking System ABS Circuit I ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS CIRCUIT WD From 1992 models IDIODE c 19 II MGIUR RELAY r 8 9 COMBINATION COMBINATION METER METER 0 o OIA AC Ii k6 127 Ai 117 119 Al A A V V Y Y Y Y TSB Revision ...

Page 281: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit SPEED SENSOR I FRONT LEFT SIDEl R _G1HOT SIDE A 13 OPEN c0NNECT01 Y Y Y 4 20 m E YY cl I I 7 q STOP LIGHT SWITCH TSB Revision ...

Page 282: ...CK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS CIRCUIT AWD 1990 models LAIN TUSIB INK 2 8 OF 3DIODE c 19 SENSOR FRONT D 44 l Jl I C 2 SENSOR REAR F 09 1 J m 3 7 0 U____ 3 I 23 ABS CONTROL F 23 z UNIT FRONT SIDE on x 4 C 18 jiiiaq DATA LINK REVERSE SIDE CONNECTOR X35 AC Hl530 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 283: ...CUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 283 _ _ SUB FUSIB LINK f 8 J B SPEED SENSOR STOP LIGHT SWITCH c 47 FRONT R E A R LEFAT_FIDE RIfH OSIDE ga I c A A 1 RESISTOR F 25 l 1 Eli 2 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 284: ...LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS CIRCUIT AWD 1991 models IGNITION S I H MAIN FUSIB LINK 2 Y3 MAIN FUSIB LINK 3 B 1 J d I 7U gE2 COMBINATION METER C 52 GENERATOR I 1 3 5 9 23 L CONTROL F 23 e FRONT SIDE 4 C 18 piqizlq k i HE REVERSE SIDE m 635 AC HlS49 NY I IK TSB Revision I ...

Page 285: ...uit 285 SUB FUSIB LINK 1 8 J B OPEN CONNECTOF c 47 STOP LIGHT SWITCH STOP LIGHT SPEED SENSOR SWITCH I c 47 FRONT REAR LEFT SIDE RIfM oSIDE A 13 LEFTGf yE RIGHT SIDE G 02 l 5J m IEJ m 2 c 1 25 G f 0 ii STOP I I 1 o t LIGHT I RESISTOR F 25 l TSB Revision ...

Page 286: ...Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS CIRCUIT AWD 1992 models MAIN MAIiI FUSIB 5 FUSIB LINK 2 LINK 3 8 A B S POWER RELAY g I cl 53 u m 13 12 3 ________ L L z I I 8 GB t IRO UNIT cl 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 287: ... DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 287 STOP LlGHT SWITCH SPEED SENSOR STOP LIGHT SWITCH c 47 FRONT REAR LEFT SIDE RI H oSIDE A 13 LEFTG yE RIGHT SIDE G 02 f l l m j 1 25 G l STOP LIGHT TSB Revision ...

Page 288: ...D Name Symbol Name Symbol ABS control unit E Diode G ABS motor relay A Front speed sensor B ABS power relay F Rear speed sensor D ABS valve relay A Stop light switch H ABS warning light C NOTE The name column is arranged in alphabettcal order 14A0542 ABS motor rela TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 289: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 289 1410291 2 I1 TSB Revision ...

Page 290: ...Name Symbol Name Symbol ABS control unit F Diode H ABS motor relay A Front speed sensor B ABS power relay I ABS valve relay ABS warning light Brake fluid pressure switch H G sensor front G A G sensor rear E C Rear speed sensor D J Stop light switch I TSB Revision ...

Page 291: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Anti Lock Braking System ABS Circuit 291 Non Turbo Turbo Stop light switch TSB Revision ...

Page 292: ...T LINK 1 C 36 BLE ITCH IGl SUB FUSI IGNITION 3 c c I a B 1 3 _ I I L 1 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT Al V Iii 3 I lf _ 1 i 3 17 3 COLUMN SWITCH I AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SW ITCH IRESU c 09 18 19 4 f iyi UISE ACTUATOR A 54 16 IQ 34 K35 AC H1534 NY TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 293: ...e Control Circuit M T 293 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR J B DIODE c 49 1 L J B STOP LIGHT SWITCH C 48 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT c 01 OPEN F8 c 47 1 Bl 2 3 l y STOP LIGHT E a 3 10 GNC V J B 16C 52 c 40 J C 38 1 17 C 18 TSB Revision ...

Page 294: ...t M T AUTO CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT M T 1990 models IGNITION 2 cl ITCH IG1 SUB FUSIBL E 15P AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT l i L 7 I 1C 1 i 3 17 _ __ 3 XII 9 20 r 3 5 18 3 2 19 7 E JX UISE ACTUATOR A 64 1 6 El a4 I C 36 1 aIalI K35 AC H1535 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 295: ...ol Circuit M T COMBINAT METER AUTO CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR J B DIODE L c 49 T STOP LIGHT SW I TCH C 48 I 2 El 34 5 3 I z 6 l I I 0 OFF ON ON 1 OFF 4 5 3 Y Ei d AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT OPEN CONNEC TOR i STOP LIGHT m Al I 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 296: ...t M T AUTO CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT M T 1991 models iIBLE IITCH IG1 PlYI B c k J B 1011 I z 7 z c 39 COMBI r NATION METER 1 c 01 AUTO CRUISE UOTOR I J I DRIVE IC 26 13 I 0 L L__ 0 4 HP 5 _ c 3 w COLUMN SWITCH a c 07 1 3 I I I I A ML I e J TSB Revision ...

Page 297: ...ise Control Circuit M T 297 AUTO CRUISE i M NAT ON CONTROL ACTUATOR 1 c3 Ll I AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT c 01 CTOR c 47 1 cl 2 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 1 STOP LIGHT 3 G N D V SV I 1 14 F m m d 2 6C 52 c 40 1 C 38 z 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 298: ...ED M T 1991 models AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT c 01 I m SOHC h 6 I I DOHC I I I I I 6 T5 Y5 Y 4 I 5 7 _______ __ _ _ c 07 1 I I I I 5 3 I J 1 I C 07 l c c t C OPP IDLE SPEED CONTROL MOTOR POSITION SENSOR B 02 2 mp 4 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION v o WITCH B 22 2 ml 4 KX35 AC Hl555A NY TSB Revision ...

Page 299: ... 1992 models IGNITION ITCH IG3 LINK SUB FUSIBl 1234 m 6676 I c 43 El 1 1 C 36 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT V d18 y17 6 13 2 5 __ _ In e 1 13 19 8 81T 01 1 O OLUMN SWITCH MJTO CRU16E ONTROL SWITCH I 13 lEEa 6 a 6 7 6 34 0 II c 07 C 10 I I I 2 AUTO CRUISE SX lL PUMP A 54 m I C L TSB Revision ...

Page 300: ...T CONTINUED M T I 992 models iE OL iTOR COLUMN SWITCH AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT c 01 HiM ECTOR c 47 I 8 2 GND V 2 2 I B i C 18 BTOP LIGHT SWITCH C 6C 52 1 G c 40 I 1 I 23 1 C 38 1 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT STOP LIGHT DATA LINK CONNECTOR FRONT BIDE pl imq REVERSE SIDE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 301: ...GRAMS Auto Cruise Control Circuit M T 301 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT C 01 SOHC DOHC IDLE SPEED CONTROL MOTOR POSITION SENSOR 6 f z c 1 1II fLE ION H 2 1 t 2 iv 2 17 TROL c 12 UNIT KX3 5 AC H1553A NY TSB Revision I I ...

Page 302: ... models IGNITION WITCH IG1 LINK nl B I 3 C 36 1 IBLE SUB FUS J B r c 01 AUTO CRUISE J I J MOTOR I DRIVE IC 7 6 cl A1I y30196ET 01 017 3r 13 m 83 34 6 6 1 6 6 10 c 07 1 3 c 12 65 1 EH 9 2 POSITION SWITCH C 46 I IQ 2 i5 a IO I I I I 0 m OLlJMN SWITCH UTO CRUISE ONTROL SWITCH C 69 TSB Revision ...

Page 303: ... CRUISE CONTROL UNIT c 01 I a 4L L m CL D iz 2 I B GNC V GNO V 14 I mz 2 c 07 1 pfaq ii3 m IfI J 5I c 10 5 C 1 CTOR l 01 4 I z 47 I E 2 16C 52 l 4 11619 41616 718 101 qllllqrsllqlqisll s J I c 40 7 1 C 38 93 I Ial 34 E z 123 El 4 c 01 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 1 STOP LIGHT C TSB Revision ...

Page 304: ...CUIT CONTINUED M T 1993 models J UISE 8E UNIT c 01 I SOHC 7 r l I I DOHC St a 7 I c 07 1 r g 12 24 c3 s 0 I 0 0 10 0 2 G I u G B 02 1 fTj 2 3 FkiE LE POSITION o f iWITCH I 1 4 7c 07 l _ 9 23 Ll CLOSED 4 gpp B 22 2 Ei 8 UN fRoL c 12 SOHC XXSS AC H1561A NY c 12 DOHC TSB Revision ...

Page 305: ...305 NOTES ...

Page 306: ...UTO CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT A T 1989 models IGNITION 1GNI J SWITC D 44 C 24 A 41 A 09 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT n 112131415l817l8 I c 50 1 la 10 11 1 13 14 16 6 I p7J COMBINATION METER c 52 7 J B m t FRONT SIDE pi imq REVERSE SIDE I AC H1538 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 307: ...CH IGl L I N K SUB FUSIE c c 01 L AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT I J B 7 b 16 1 f j C 0 15A s C lm COLUMN SWITCH q B I C 36 p AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH J B c 09 I a AUTO CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR m ch A 19 0 85 GW I OPEN CONNECTOR I P 5 sa C 48 k 1 STOP LIGHT TSB Revision ...

Page 308: ...SE CONTROL CIRCUIT A T 1990 models I234 m 5676 1 2 I 23 3 m STARTER MOTOR 15 AC H1537 NY I J L I C 42 5 3c 39 2 1 2 m 3456 i3 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT ELC 4 SPEED AUK 4ATIC rnLE MODULE J B 2 5 I c 18 FaEk f FRONT SIDE I REVERSE SIDE pTz dq A oB TSB Revision I ...

Page 309: ... C 36 I J B i c 44 SUB FUSIE c 01 L AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT I J B TUR DRIVE 3 c c 7 II T COLUMN SWITCH AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH 2 Q m l3 c 09 f NATION CRUISE INDICATOR I LIGHT AUTO CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR A 54 c 52 gti3 Eg DIOiE c 49 0 85 GW I OPEN CONNECTOR STOP LIGHT TSB Revision ...

Page 310: ...ON SWITCH IG2 I 1 P 4 m 6878 c 4342 J B r 4II c 58 u C 24 3 7 fI I I I C 60 3 OD OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ARK NEUTRAL L pN I A 43 I i I zig 2 BATTERY I 7 L zi E cl ii ziiii 0 CL m B lB l l B 19 I m E II 3 D s a a I AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 1 V 14 J9 r24 C 01 J 7 c 40 J B m FRONT SIDE fiKi iq REVERSE SIDE STARTER MOTOR TSB Revision ...

Page 311: ...l Circuit A T 311 IGNITION SWITCH IGl c 01 s u AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT YT 2 Y 1 c n II IBLE if 1 l C 36 1J B j 4 ml c 0 15A J l 25 GW OPEN J CONNECTOR B c 47 2 15 c 5 3 ff E 6 3 I 7 C 52 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT STOP LIGHT TSB Revision ...

Page 312: ...91 models AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT c 01 _ _______ _ _ SOHC I r F s I I DOHC I I I 6 Y5 Y4 Y5 Y4 1 Fgi l W I 7 c 07 1 W 1DL E SPEED CONTROL MOTOR POSITION SENSOR R 02 2 WJ 4 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION h W g l OFF ON CLOSiD THRO ITLE ON B 22 2 Ia MFI c 12 CONTROL UNIT KX35 AC H1557A NY TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 313: ...CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT A T 1992 models 313 IGNITION SWITCHtST J B 2 13 c 39 z m C 24b3 7 it ZzG L CL C 60 10 1 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 4 OD OFF INDICATOR LIGHT I3 5V 5v L z t BATTERY I I 14 J9 Ic 16 A LINK NECTOR DA CON FRONT SIDE pT dwq 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 314: ... IGl COLUMN EWITCH COMBINATION KETER I CRUISE I ND I CATOR LIGHT C 52 I 1 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT ct c 0 SUB FUSIE E c 01 i I AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT AUTO CRUISE RL PUMP lEQ A 54 1 mR InyE 26 a 4 a 4 I f b 13 12 5 5 10 1 2 I 3 n2 i II I I I I 1 I J I 1 25 GW OPEN coNNEcTo STOP LIGHT LINK II3 I C 36 JJ B ia TSB Revision I ...

Page 315: ..._ _ _ SOHC I 1 I 6 I I DOHC I I I I b 6 7 5 Y4 Y5 Y4 I i 7 c 07 1 W I w G IDLE SPEED CONTROL MOTOR POSITION SENSOR B 02 2 I 1 4 CLOSED THRO lTLE POSITION IjV __ _ ___ _ _A A__ _ _ I MFI c 12 CONTROL UNIT I I I I I I I I B 02 1 jzm 2 VA 1 7 c 07 3 W I W E l KXSS AC HlSSBA KY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 316: ... AUTO CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT A T 1993 models IGNITION SWITCHtST IGNITION SWITCH IG2 Tl A 7 6 F kc s I6 3 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UN1 T OD OFF INDICATOR LIGHT ARK NEUTRAL pN A 43 El B 18 r COMBINATION METER i i5 I 5 ti C 18 DATA LINK CONNECTOR TSB Revision I ...

Page 317: ...ntrol Circuit A T IGNITION SWITCH IGl SUB FUSI AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UN I C 52 n 11213141516171 3 I P I 3 AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 26 STOP LIGHT I I I I _____ e J I 1 25 GW OPEN CONNECTC Q c 47 STOP LIGHT BLE 1 C 36 1 J B TSB Revision ...

Page 318: ... Auto Cruise Control Circuit A T AUTO CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUED A T 1993 models P G r ___ _ c t c l s 12 4 CLOSED THROTTLE 0 gll ON ON t 1 4 7c 07 1 E t E E 111 122 MFI c 12 gJ ROL KX35 AC tl1562A NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 319: ...319 NOTES ...

Page 320: ...trol actuator Vacuum type I3 sensor SOHC Auto cruise control switch J Park neutral position switch A T A I Auto cruise control unit I F I Overdnve switch A T I L Auto cruise control vacuum pump Vacuum type Stop light switch N C Throttle position sensor E Auto cruise indicator light Clutch pedal position switch M T Diode I Vehicle speed sensor Reed switch H 0 4 speed automatic transaxle control mod...

Page 321: ...AGRAMS Auto Cruise Control Circuit 321 1 9 9 2 models Idle speed control motor closed throttle position switch and idle speed control motor position sensor y 16AO400 I 1 TSB Revision vacuum pump Closed throttle I ...

Page 322: ...322 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Auto Cruise Control Circuit 16AOOSI 4989 models Rc ii IAuto cruise _ l 07AOO23 l6AO6S2 Auto cruise indicator light i I 03Ao275 TSB Revision ...

Page 323: ...yuT 3 plii q ELECTRONIC CONTROL POWER STEERING C 63 CONTROL UNIT z ac 37 c 43 3 I J B 1 3 C 32 i 1 1 CLZ Z fN C POWER STEERING I MODE CHANGE OVER SWITCH D 46 I ILLOFF 24 15 m EgJ C RHE zi 3 J C GROUND 6 I J B i 1 j J C TAIL 21 E 01 I iT2TsTiill RHEOSTAT ml C 52 I 1 2 A 59 LEC lNI POWER GTEERING OID c 3 FRONT SIDE piR Rq REVERSE iI pl midq c 43 224 ml 5616 E 55 AC H155 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 324: ...rcuit r J C TAIL E 01 m RHEOSTAT ELECTRONIC CONTROL POWER STEERING CIRCUIT From 1991 models kLy I GHT IGNITION SWITCH IG2 C 32 c 43 1234 m 5676 I 46 I 1 I C GROUND J B L 112 C 18 DATA LINI CCINNECTUR n I_ gbUC RfN1 C POWER STEER1 NG SOLENOID VALVE TSB Revision I ...

Page 325: ...GRAMS Electronic Control Power Steering EPS Circuit 325 COMPONENT LOCATION r Name 1 Symbol E P S control unit A I 1 E P S mode selector switch I B Data link connector C I models I j _ selector switch TSB Revision ...

Page 326: ...Belt Circuit AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CIRCUIT Up to 1990 models IN IG1 SUB FUSIBLE LINK 0 2 BW 7 c 43 1234 IEB 7 I C 36 m 5676 B I J B 10A c 39 G EEN K REMOVED AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l 7 EiJzj D 43 l 35 AC H1532 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 327: ...IT SUB FUSIBLE LINK I 16 D 24 l 3 I Bl 2 2 D 21 1 ci 3 J 4 I IN c ON AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RIGHT SIDE AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RELAY RIGHT SIDE OF j _ 3 m 14 m 1 I A19 J 38 r l i AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l m m TSB Revision ...

Page 328: ...at Belt Circuit AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CIRCUIT From 1991 models SUB FUSIBLE LINK a C 39 I 7 c 37 1 1 z I IOD OR STORAGE CONNECTOR V AUTOMATIC 7 I SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l q3 iMRLf ELT SWITCH m D 43 l m CL 1 5 AC Hl55wNM TSB Revision ...

Page 329: ... indicates venic I 4 c f AT El LEFT c SIDE Ora 1IN 1 T e i tcl D 34 l m 1 P p s is m AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l dl AUT I OMATIC BELT AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RELAY RIGHT SIDE es with THEFT ALARM SYSTEM I I l l t r1 d Y a CL a F3_j ix tt 1 2 1 1 CxQ AUTOMATIC SEAT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l BELT TSB Revision ...

Page 330: ...t belt control unit Automatic seat belt motor Automatic seat belt motor relay Buckle switch Buzzer Symbol Name Symbol C Fasten switch A E Key reminder switch I D Outer switch F G Seat belt warning light J K Release switch l l Door latch switch B I I 19A0435 TSB Revision Door latch switch 18AO500 ...

Page 331: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Automatic Seat Belt Circuit 331 belt contra unl Release switch 69AO165 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 332: ...8 l 1 A 12 4 1 2 R 1 25 R 332 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Theft Alarm System Circuit THEFT ALARM SYSTEM CIRCUIT ii d F5 1 r IEADLIGH I A 17 m 1 1 6I c 3 I _ A 01X 2 q L lx 34 1 HEADLIGHT q A 12 2 A 12 3 d __ 4 N I C 1 F 2 ETACS sRoL G N D V F 1 m 22 J B z DIODE c 70 1 O C 23 I mI _ i 93 N L TSB Revision ...

Page 333: ...CH IG1 G IGNITION SWITCHtACC Y KFISIBLE 8 5 1 C 36 m _ _ _ __ _ __ _ J B I n 0 I I z L I _ 7 7 c 39 5 3 3 2 z 1 c 37 1 l zEil 1234 m 4 IOD OR P I COMBINATION 43 ii L Y I _ _ _ _ _ _ __ T J B l L 2 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR FRONT RH D 14 m 4 4 5 2 2 B m tl 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 334: ...334 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Theft Alarm System Circuit THEFT ALARM SYSTEM CIRCUIT CONTINUED DIODE J B ETACS CONTROL UN I T c 03 EN KEY REMOVED 0 REVERSE KXW AC IllSBOA NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 335: ...ST IGN ZRY SWI 2 1 C 2 1 STARTER I RELAY I c 70 1 3 2 1II1 xK STARTER RELAY c 74x L r I r 33 ETACS CONTROL UNIT z I1 DIODE C 46 2 5 z 9 m D 33 1294 m 6 676 C 24 s CL A 41 I 12 la 3 Er B 19 IFF 1 T Yz ir Q M A A STARTER MOTER LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE I I Y I FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH TSB Revision ...

Page 336: ...me Symbol Name Diode D Security light Diode E Theft alarm headlight relay Diode E Theft alarm horn relay ETACS control unit C Theft alarm starter relay Symbol F A I3 D NOTE The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order Engine compartment Interior 13A0218 TSB Revision ...

Page 337: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Theft Alarm System Circuit I Security light 68Amw3 TSB Revision ...

Page 338: ...NOTES ...

Page 339: ...tering 16 Steering Wheel Free Play Check 15 Steering Wheel Return to Center Check 19 Tie Rod End Ball Joint Starting Torque Check 15 Tie Rod End Ball Joint Variation Check 15 V Belt Tension Check 21 SPECIAL TOOLS 5 SPECIFICATIONS 2 General Specifications 2 Lubricants 4 Sealants and Adhesives 4 Service Specifications 2 Torque Specifications 3 STEERING WHEEL AND SHAFT 25 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 E P S Circ...

Page 340: ...Conventional power steering 37 8 4WS power steering 37 8 E P S 28 6 V belt deflection mm in 6 9 24 35 Oil pump pressure MPa psi Pressure gauge valve closed 7 5 8 2 1 067 1 166 Pressure gauge valve opened 0 8 1 0 114 142 EPS solenoid current A 0 9 1 1 Total pinion torque N m in lbs 0 6 1 3 5 1 1 Tie rod joint swing resistance N Ibs 8 20 1 9 4 6 Tie rod joint swing torque N m in lbs 2 5 17 43 imit S...

Page 341: ... Gear box mounting bracket to crossmember 60 80 43 58 Tie rod end lock nut 50 55 36 40 Tie rod to rack 80 100 58 72 Feed tubes 12 18 9 13 End plug 50 70 36 51 Pinion and valve assembly to self locking nut 20 30 14 22 Rack support cover locking nut 50 70 36 51 Solenoid valve 15 22 11 16 PCV cap assembly 15 22 11 16 Valve housing installation bolts 17 26 12 19 4WS oil line to gear box 30 40 22 29 Co...

Page 342: ...cified lubricant Quantity Steering Bellows gear box Silicone grease A s r e q u i r e d Rack and pinion Repair kit grease Bearing Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II O ring Oil seal Rack cover Pinion and valve assembly seal ring part Oil pump Flow control valve Friction surface of rotor vane cam ring and pump cover O ring Power steering fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 0 9 dm3 95 qt...

Page 343: ...Scan tool Multi use of stationary steering effort during high speed driving easuremen MB990993 or Power steering oil pressure gauge adapter pump side Measurement o MB990994 Power steering oil pressure gauge adapter hose side Measurement of oil pressure Adjustment of rack support Removal of rack support cover TSB Revision ...

Page 344: ...n oil pump pressure Repair or replace oil pump gear box Incorrect mounting of the steering gear box Retighten on the crossmember Twisted firewall cover with steering shaft Malfunction of the E P S control unit re lated to wiring Refer to troubleshooting guide related to E P S control During operation of the E P S control unit fail safe function Improper front wheel alignment Adjust Damaged V belt ...

Page 345: ...de Tires Rotate Assuming that the tire inflation pressure tire wear front alignment and front wheels are all normal 3eering effort remains Malfunction of control unit or wiring The Refer to Trouble Symptom 1 of the ight at moderate and engine speed signal and vehicle speed sig flow chart type troubleshooting guide ligh speeds nal are both not being input Malfunction of solenoid or P C V Check flui...

Page 346: ...ellows for leakage Because the gear box to piping coupling is sealed by an O ring carefully check whether it is damaged before retightening 3 A soft humming sound can be heard from the oil pump when the steering wheel is turned while the vehicle is 4 standtng still This sound is caused by the pulsing of the fluid inside the pump and does not indicate a malfunction If the steering wheel is turned w...

Page 347: ... or not E P S solenoid harness Fail safe system activation Each harness continuity and control unit power supply cir cuit 3 No change of the steering effort characteristic when the E P S mode select switch is used E P S mode select switch Control unit Control unit activation Continuityof E P S mode select switch Each harness continuity and control unit power supply cir cuit 37A 59 37A 59 Control u...

Page 348: ...ion of the E P S solenoid s current when the simulated speed signal is No increased Control unit side terminal No 3 0 9 1 1 A at vehicle speed of Okm h 0 mph Damaged or disconnected wir ing between the control unit harness side terminal No 2 and the data link connec tor s terminal No 11 or a poor connection of the connector Malfunction of E P S solenoid or PCV Repair the connector connec tion or r...

Page 349: ... power supply OK Yes Harness short circuit harness damage etc Repair the harness or replace the fuse Disconnect the connector of the control unit check with the ignition switch at the ON position No a Damaged or di Repair the harness I ino of harness between fuse and control unit harness side connector terminal No 6 IYes Disconnect the battery neg ative terminal and check No control unit harness s...

Page 350: ...lUe Ot the t oower supolv OK Harness short circuit harness damage etc Repair the harness or replace the fuse Is there an alternately repeat N tng condrtron of contrnurty and non continuity between termi the control unit and ground each time the E P S mode selector switch is switched ON and OFF Yes If always non continuity 0 Disconnected switch con nector or damaged or dis connected harness wiring ...

Page 351: ... 11 P o w e r transistor 1 Tn 8 Y i Engine speed detection circuit E P S control un detection circuit I I Solenoid current characteristic Vehicle speed Solenoid current switching circuit detection circuit control circuit 8vYi I I Y 1 Y 4 Y 9 E P S I A Speed sensor connecror Front side piiiaq Reverse side TSB Revision 1 2 13A0344 ...

Page 352: ...37A 14 STEERING Troubleshooting LOCATION OF E P S CONTROL COMPONENTS Name E P S control unit E P S mode selector switch Data link connector Symbol A B C switch I 13A0218 I selector switch TSB Revision ...

Page 353: ...the play exceeds the standard value remove steering gear box and check total pinion torque M37FDBK 1 Set front wheels on turning radius gauge and measure steering angle FWD AWD MIT Inner wheel 37 3O f 2 Outer wheel 30 40 AWD A T Inner wheel 35 OO f 2 Outer wheel 29 20 2 When not within the standard value it is probably a toe problem Adjust toe Refer to GROUP 26 Service Adjust ment Procedures and r...

Page 354: ... tape and a ruler 2 Drive straight ahead on an uncambered level surface 3 When the vehicle s wheels are pointing straight ahead mark the steering wheel hub and column cover with a chalk or tape line 4 Stop the vehicle and line up the marks on the hub and column cover 5 Place a tape strip or mark on the steering wheel rim 6 Hold a ruler next to the rim as shown in the illustration and then steer th...

Page 355: ...ion that the steering wheel is off center If the steering wheel is off center to the left center it by adjusting the tie rods to make the front wheels steer toward the left and vice versa 1 Mark the tie rods and tie rod ends with chalk before loosening the lock nuts 2 Hold the tie rod with a wrench and loosen the lock nut 3 Hold the tie rod end with a wrench and turn the tie rod the desired number...

Page 356: ... the vehicle speed is detected by the E P S solenoid thereby changing the required steering effort and therefore after checking the E P S solenoid a tester should be used to input simulat ed speed signals so that the required stationary steering effort during simulated high speed driving can be checked For information concerning the checking of the E P S solenoid and the set up of the tester refer...

Page 357: ...rns 2 At a speed of 35 km h 22 mph turn the steering wheel 90 and release the steering wheel after 1 or 2 seconds If the steering wheel then returns 70 or more the return can be judged to the satisfactory NOTE There will be a momentary feeling or heaviness when the wheel is turned quickly but this is not abnormal This is because the oil pump discharge amount is especially apt to be insufficient du...

Page 358: ...light is flashing If it remains steadily illuminated rather that flashing move the vehicle forward about 0 3 0 4 m 98 1 31 ft until it begins flashing 2 Disconnect the wiring harness connector the waterproof connector in the engine compartment of the E P S solenoid valve and then connect a voltmeter between the solenoid valve connector and the harness at the body side Caution Do not ground the sol...

Page 359: ...il pump and while manually providing the suitable amount of tension adjust the amount of flexion of the belt 3 Tighten bolts A B and C for holding the oil pump 4 Check the amount of flexion of the belt readjust if necessary Caution The check should be made after turning the engine one time or more in the regular direction of rotation to the right FLUID LEVEL CHECK M37flAl 1 Park the vehicle on a f...

Page 360: ...right five or six time 4 ing the starting motor intermittently turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right five or six times for Caution 1 During air bleeding replenish the fluid supply so that the level never falls below the lower position of the filter 2 If air bleeding is done while engine is running the air will be broken up and absorbed into the fluid be sure to do the bleeding ...

Page 361: ...onds 5 If it is not within the standard value overhaul the oil pump 6 Remove the special tools and then tighten the pressure hose to the sp ecified torque 7 Bleed the system CHECKING THE PRESSURE UNDER NO LOAD CONDI TIONS 1 Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump and then connect the special tools 2 Bleed the air and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving...

Page 362: ...asure fluid pressure Remove the special tools and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque Bleed the system OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK M37FUAA 1 Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump and then connect the special tools 2 Bleed the air and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50 60...

Page 363: ...s Removal steps 1 Joint assembly and gear box connecting bolt a 2 Horn pad a 4 Steering wheel 5 Instrument under cover Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Panel 6 Foot shower duct and lap shower duct 13A0336 10 Column cover lower 11 Column cover upper 12 Connector 13 Cover attaching bolt 14 Lower bracket installation bolt 15 Tilt bracket installtion bolt 16 Steering column assembly TSB Revision I ...

Page 364: ...odels 4 Steering wheel 5 Knee protector Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Panel 6 Foot shower duct and lap shower duct 7 Cover A T Transaxle Control 10 Column cover lower 11 Column cover upper 12 Connector 13 Cover attaching bolt 14 Lower bracket installation bolt 15 Tilt bracket installation bolt 16 Steering column assembly 8 Key interlock cable steering lock assembly side A T Refer to GROUP 23 Transa...

Page 365: ...P 52 Instrument Panel 6 Foot shower duct and lap shower duct 7 Cover A T 8 Key interlock cable steering lock assembly side A T Refer to GROUP 23 Transaxle Control 13AO423 1310343 9 Slide lever AIT Refer to GROUP 23 Transaxle Control 10 Column cover lower 11 Column cover upper 12 Connector 13 Cover attaching bolt 14 Lower bracket installation bolt 15 Tilt bracket installation bolt 16 Steering colum...

Page 366: ... Remove the snap ring and then tap out the clevis pin from the inner side of the column tube lower INSPECTION M37GGAD l Check the steering shaft for damage and deformation l Check the joints for play damage or rough movement l Check the joint bearing for wear and damage l Check the tilt bracket for cracks and damage l Check the column bushing for damage l Check the dust cover for damage SERVICE PO...

Page 367: ...oint assembly 5 Column switch 6 Steering lock installation special bolt w l 7 Steering lock bracket do l 8 Steering lock 9 Snap ring 10 Stopper 11 Bearing spacer e 12 Column tube clamp 13 Column tube upper 14 Steering shaft 15 Bearing spacer 16 Column bushing 17 Column tube lower 41 l 18 Bearing 19 Snap ring 4e 20 Clevis pin 2 1 Bushing 22 Lower bracket WA0287 TSB Revision ...

Page 368: ...upwards Caution Take care when removing the horn pad as the horn switch harness is connected 4 REMOVAL OF STEERING WHEEL Remove the steering wheel by using a steering wheel puller Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel to remove doing so may damage the collapsible mechanism it SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 2 INSTALLATION OF HORN PAD aype 2 1 Screw on the horn pad installation bracket 2 Push ...

Page 369: ...ly install the steering lock in alignment with the column boss 2 After checking that the lock works properly tighten the special bolts until the head twists off Caution The steering lock bracket and blots must be re placed with new ones when the steering lock is installed 4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT ASSEMBLY 3 BEARING 2 COVER ASSEMBLY 1 Install the cover assembly on the joint assembly 2 Fill the insid...

Page 370: ...ustment of the Front Wheel Alignment Refer to GROUP 33A Sewce Adjustment Procedures c 30 42 Nm 22 30 ft lbs I 80 100 Nm t 70 51 m _ ml him I vv I 30 40 Nm d 22 29 ft lbs 1 Joint assembly and gear box connecting bolt 2 Connection for return tube 3 Connection for pressure hose 4 Solenoid valve connector Vehicles with E P S 5 Cotter pin 6 Tie rod end and knuckle connecting 7 Tie rod end 8 Stay 9 Stab...

Page 371: ... SWING RESISTANCE 1 Give 10 hard swings to the tie rod 2 Measure the tie rod swing resistance with a spring scale Standard value 8 20 N 1 9 4 6 Ibs 2 5 N m 17 48 in lbs 3 If the measured value exceeds the standard value replace the tie rod assembly NOTE Even if the measured value is below the standard value the tie rod which swings smoothly without excessive play may be used TIE ROD END BALL JOINT...

Page 372: ...andard range first adjust the rack support cover and then check the total pinion torque again If the total pinion torque cannot be adjusted to within the standard value range by adjusting the rack support cover check the rack support cover rack support spring rack support and replace any parts necessary 13R0077 TSB Revision SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION M37PDAB 15 INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING RUBBER ...

Page 373: ...tube 11 O ring l Adjustment of total pinion torque 14 End plug 15 Self locking nut 16 Locking nut 4 17 Rack support cover 18 Rack support spring 19 Rack support 24 Valve housing 25 Oil seal l 26 Pinion and valve assembly l 27 Seal ring 80 100 Nm i 58 72 ft Ibs 12Ao205 4 l 29 Ball bearing l 30 Oil seal l 31 Circlip 32 Rack stopper I 33 Rack bushing W I 34 Rack l 35 O ring 4 l 36 Oil seal 37 Seal ri...

Page 374: ...on torque c l 14 End plug 15 Self locking nut 16 Locking nut c 17 Rack support cover 18 Rack support spring 19 Rack support 20 Solenoid valve l 4 21 O ring c 22 P C V cap assembly 23 O ring 24 Valve housing be l 4 25 Oil seal 26 Pinion and valve assembly l 27 Seal ring l 28 O ring 4 I 29 Ball bearing 4 l 30 Oil seal 31 Circlip 32 Rack stopper I 33 Rack bushing ee 1 4 34 Rack 35 O ring a l 36 Oil s...

Page 375: ...10 Feed tube Il O ring 12 Connector 13 O ring l 4 Adjustment of total pinion torque l a 14 End plug 15 Self locking nut 16 Locking nut 4 17 Rack support cover 18 Rack support spring 19 Rack support 24 Valve housing 4 I 4 25 Oil seal l 26 Pinion and valve assembly l 27 Seal ring e l 29 Ball bearing 4 l 4 30 Oil seal l 4 31 Circlip 32 Rack stopper l 33 Rack bushing e l 34 Rack l 4 35 O ring 4e l 4 3...

Page 376: ...BRICATION AND SEALING POINTS Guide Oil seal Back up washer dle roller ing MB990776 01 13AO259 Sealant 3M ATD Part No 8663 or equivalent I Grease Repair kii grease Sealant 3M ATD Part No 8663 or equivalent Grease ReDair kii arease TSB Revision ...

Page 377: ...teering gear box I E P S gear box r onventional power E P S gear box steering gear box tWS power steering gear box rl n Conventional power E P S gear box steering gear box 4WS power steering gear box uRo55a Grease Repair kii grease Grease Silicone grease E P S gear box _ __ L TSB Revision I ...

Page 378: ...ich fixes the tie rod and rack with a chisel 14 REMOVAL OF END PLUG Disconnect end plug caulking and remove end plug 17 REMOVAL OF RACK SUPPORT COVER Using the special tool remove the rack support cover from the gear box 22 REMOVAL OF P C V CAP ASSEMBLY E P S Remove the P C V cap assembly from the valve housing Caution Do not uncrimp the upper crimp of the PCV cap assembly because to do so will re...

Page 379: ...1 REMOVAL OF CIRCLIP 1 Turn the rack stopper clockwise until the end of the circlip comes out of the slot in the rack housing 2 Turn the rack stopper counterclockwise to remove the circlip 34 REMOVAL OF RACK Pull out the rack slowly At this time also take out the rack stopper and the rack bushing simultaneously 36 REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL Partially bend oil seal and remove from rack bushing Caution Do ...

Page 380: ...the inner surface of the rack cylinder of the gear housing INSPECTION RACK M37PGAF 0 Check the rack tooth surfaces for damage or wear l Check the oil seal contact surfaces for uneven wear l Check the rack for bends PINION AND VALVE ASSEMBLY l Check the pinion gear tooth surfaces for damage or wear l Check for worn or defective seal ring BEARING l Check for roughness or abnormal noise during bearin...

Page 381: ...ating of the specified fluid to the outside of the oil seal Specified fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 2 Using a tool press the back up washer and the oil seat into the rack housing to the specified position where the upper surface of the press in guide coincides with the stepped part of the press in tool 40 INSTALLATION OF NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING 1 Apply specified fluid to housing beari...

Page 382: ... grease 2 Cover rack serrations 3 Apply specified fluid on cover Specified fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 4 Match oil seal center with rack to prevent retainer spring from slipping and slowly insert rack from power cylinder side 33 INSTALLATION OF RACK BUSHING ASSEMBLY Wrap the rack end with vinyl tape apply a coating of the specified fluid and then install the rack bushing and rack ...

Page 383: ...valve housing Specified fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 28 INSTALLATION OF BALL BEARING Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the ball bearing Using a tool press the oil seal into the valve housing Specified fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 28 INSTALLATION OF O RING E P S 127 SEAL RlNGI26 PINION AND VALVE ASSEMBLY 1 When installing O ring and seal ring p...

Page 384: ...m I 039 in from the housing edge surface 21 INSTALLATION OF O RING EPS Caution The O ring for the solenoid valve is a thermal resistant O ring It is painted white on its outer circumference to distinguish it from other O rings and care should be taken to use the correct one 14 INSTALLATION OF END PLUG 1 Apply the specified sealant to the threaded part of the end plug Specified sealant 3M ATD Part ...

Page 385: ... check rack support cover components or re place 3 After adjusting lock rack support cover with lock nut 9 INSTALLATION OF TIE ROD After installing tie rod to rack fold tab washer end 2 locations to tie rod notch 4 INSTALLATION OF DUST COVER 1 Pack dust cover interior and lip with multipurpose 2 Kt especified sealant to dust cover Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No 8663 or equiva lent 3 Using the sp...

Page 386: ...the Oil Pump Pressure Refer t o P 37A 23 t o P 37A 23 Check the 4WS operation Refer to Check the 4WS operation Refer to GROUP 37B Service Adjustment GROUP 37B Service Adjustment Procedures Procedures 14 21 Nm 25 33 ft lbs Y 7 10 ft lbs Vehicles without 4WS 9 14 Nm 7 10 ft lbs Vehicles with 4WS 7 10 ft lbs Removal steps 1 Pressure switch connector 2 Return hose connection l 3 Suction hose 4 Pressur...

Page 387: ...for cracks l Check the pulley assembly for uneven rotation 20 25 mm Spool 13AOlQA SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION M37RDAI 3 CONNECTION OF SUCTION HOSE When connecting the suction hose to the oil pump the amount of insertion should be as shown in the illustration NOTE Install the hoses so that they are not twisted and so that they do not come in contact with any other parts 1 Replenish automatic tra...

Page 388: ...ring I 5 Vanes l 6 Snap ring l 7 Rotor l 8 Pulley assembly 12 Suction connector 13 O ring 14 Oil seal 15 Connector a 16 O rings 17 Flow control valve 18 Flow control spring 19 Terminal assembly 20 21 Snap ring Terminal 22 Washer 23 Insulator I 24 25 O ring Plug l 26 O ring l C 27 Spring 28 29 Plunger Piston rod 30 Oil pump body Caution 1 Do not try to disassemble the pulley it is press fit onto th...

Page 389: ...g I 7 Rotor l 8 Pulley assembly I 9 Side plate I 10 O ring l 1 1 O ring 12 Suction connector I 4 13 O ring 14 Oil seal 15 Connector l 16 O rings l 17 Flow control valve 18 Flow control spring 19 Terminal assembly 13A035 1 30 20 Snap ring 21 22 Washer 23 Insulator I 4 24 25 Plug l 26 O ring 27 Spring 28 Plunger 29 Piston rod 30 Oil pump body Caution 1 Do not trv to disassemble the pulley it is pres...

Page 390: ...37A 52 STEERING Power Steering Oil Pump LUBRICATION POINTS Up to 1990 models I 13K752 TSB Revision ...

Page 391: ...STEERING Power Steering Oil Pump 37A 53 From 1991 models 1 1 13K753 TSB Revision ...

Page 392: ... vanes for stepped wear 0 Check the vanes for breakage CHECK OF GAP BETWEEN VANE AND ROTOR GROOVE Install vane to rotor groove as illustrated Measure the gap between vane and rotor groove with thickness gauge Limit 0 06 mm l 0024 in CHECK OF SHAFT BACKLASH OF PUMP BODY BUSHING AND PULLEY ASSEMBLY 1 Place a dial gauge at the end of the shaft of the pulley assembly 2 Move the pulley assembly up and ...

Page 393: ... Apply the specified fluid to the outside of the flow control valve Specified fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 16 INSTALLATION OF O RINGS Apply specified fluid on O rings to install Specified fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II No 1 I D x Width mm in 1 2 3 4 11 x 1 9 43 x 0748 13 x 1 9 f 51 x 0748 Up to 1990 models 15 8 x 2 4 62 x 0945 From 199 1 models 17 8 x 2 4 70 x 0945 13...

Page 394: ...LLATION OF SIDE PLATE Align the dowel pin of the pump body with the dowel pin hole of the side plate to install the side plate 7 INSTALLATION OF ROTOR Install the rotor to the pulley assembly so that the rotor s punch mark is at the pump cover side 6 INSTALLATION OF SNAP RING Lift the rotor and check to be sure that the snap ring is in the countersunk par t 5 INSTALLATION OF VANE 4 CAM RING 1 Appl...

Page 395: ...ring s punch mark is at the pump body side From 1991 models Align the dowel pin cutouts in the side plate with the dowel pin holes in the cam ring and direct the punch mark on the cam ring toward the pump body to install the cam ring 3 Apply specified fluid to the vanes and install the vanes on the rotor paying close attention to the installation direction Specified fluid Automatic transmission fl...

Page 396: ...uid DOHC Post in allation Operation 6Sp ymg of the Power Steering Bleeding of the Power Steering Fluid Line Refer to P 37A 22 1 9 14 Nm 7 rlbs SOHC DOHC Non Turbo 9 14 Nm Removal steps 1 Return hose 2 Suction hose 3 Return hose 4 Cooler tube 5 Return tube 6 Rubber hose 7 Pressure hose 8 Pressure tube 9 Return tube 10 O ring I TSB Revision ...

Page 397: ...P 0 0 0 0 NOTE O O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals E P S CONTROL UNIT To check the E P S control unit refer to the electronic controlled power steering control related troubleshooting guide and check by measuring the voltage or current of each terminal Caution When checking terminal voltage when the ignition key is ON never ground the No 2 terminal IG2 power supply the No ...

Page 398: ...NOTES ...

Page 399: ...CATIONS 2 General 2 REAR OIL LINE 13 Specifications Lubricants 3 REAR OIL PUMP 15 Service Specifications 2 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES 4 Torque Specifications 2 Ball Joint Rotation Starting Torque TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Check 8 Bleeding _ _ 4 Function Check 6 Rear Oil Pump Discharge Flow Volume Check _ _ 6 ...

Page 400: ...eading of 50 km h 31 mph for 30 seconds dm3 qts Power cylinder ball joint rotation starting torque Nm in lbs 1 Power cylinder tie rod swing N Ibs Power cylinder slide resistance N Ibs Approx 1 O I 061 0 5 4 or less 9 5 5 2 12 67 I 5 or less TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS M37cc 1 Items Power cylinder to crossmember Flared oil line nuts Power cylinder to trailing arm Tie rod end to cylinder assembly Bleeder ...

Page 401: ...ts Power steering fluid Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II Dust cover Silicone grease Quantity 1 45 dm3 1 53 qts As required SPECIAL TOOLS hl37DA 1 Tool Number Name Use M 8990993 Power steering oil Measurement of fluid flow volume I pressure gauge adaptor MB991230 Air bleeder set Air bleed TSB Revision ...

Page 402: ... pressure for rear yvheel is constantly high Long rear wheel steering delay Poor steering response oor steering return Control valve Power cylinder Oil line Oil reservoir Control valve Power cylinder Rear oil pump Power cylinder Oil leakage from control valve joint Oil leakage from piston rod Pressure hose breakage Oil reservoir deformation or oil leakage Stuck control valve spool Stuck power cyli...

Page 403: ... loosened more 9 Start the engine and raise the engine speed with the front wheels steered straight until the indicated speed is 70 80 km h 43 50 mph to operate the oil pump for the rear wheels Caution Take special care as all four wheels will be rotating NOTE The oil pump for the rear wheels will circulate when the engine speed is raised but the fluid will not circulate in the tube special tool 1...

Page 404: ...ntial support member I llA9042 REAR OIL PUMP DISCHARGE FLOW VOLUME CHECK 1 Perform the following steps before removing the feed tube 0 Raise the vehicle supporting the differential carrier with a transmission jack 0 Remove the center and rear exhaust pipes suspend ing them from the body with wire 0 Remove the differential support member Remove the rear shock absorber Jower installation 0 Remove th...

Page 405: ... end into a container by which flow volume may be measured a graduated cylinder of about 2 dm3 2 1 qts capacity 6 Start the engine increase speed slowly then hold the indicated speed of 50 km h 31 mph measuring dis charge flow volume for 30 seconds Caution While performing this work continuously add fluid into the oil reservoir Standard value Approximately 1 O dm3 1 06 qts 7 If the discharge flow ...

Page 406: ...r swinging the ball joint stud several times install the stud nut then measure the ball joint rotation starting torque Standard value 0 5 Nm 4 in lbs or less 3 If the rotation starting torque exceeds the standard value replace the tie rod end 4 If the rotation starting torque is less than the standard value check that the ball joint is not loose and operates smoothly If not replace the tie rod end...

Page 407: ... Refill Power Steering Fluid l Bieed Power Steering Fluid Line Refer to P 378 5 1 l 4WS Function Check Refer to P 37B 6 1 34 50 NN 25 36 ft lL I t c 6 1 3 2Ul 36 47 ft lbs 5 50 65 Nm 13A0092 36 47 ft lbs Removal steps 1 Pressure tube rear right 2 O ring 3 Pressure tube rear left 4 O ring l 5 Power cylinder installation nut l 6 Bolt 4 7 Power cylinder TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 408: ... slide resistance with a spring balance as shown in the illustra tion Standard value 67 N 15 Ibs or less 3 If the slide resistance exceeds the standard value replace the power cylinder 4 If the slide resistance is less than the standard value the power cylinder may be reused as long as it is not loose and slides smoothly SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION M37KDM 7 INSTALLATION OF POWER CYLINDER G POWE...

Page 409: ...fied grease Silicone grease 4 6 ftlbs Disassembly steps 1 Nut l 2 Tie rod end assembly 3 Clip 4 Wire 5 Dust cover 6 Bleeder caps 7 Bleeder screws 8 Cylinder assembly SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY M27KFAA 2 INSTALLATION OF TIE ROD END ASSEMBLY Temporarily attach the tie rod end assembly to the cylinder assembly dimension as illustrated To adjust the assembly dimensions of the tie rod end assembly re...

Page 410: ...Operation l installation of Rear Suspension Assem bly Refer to GROUP 34 Rear Suspen sion Assembly Refill Power Steering Fluid l Bleed Power Steering Fluid Line Refer to P 376 5 l 4WS Function Check Refer to P 378 6 1 1 I 9 14 Nm 7 10 ftlbs 14 21 10 15 Removal steps 1 Return hose 2 Feed tube 3 O ring 4 Pressure tube rear right 5 O ring 6 Pressure tube rear left 7 O ring 8 Pressure tube front left f...

Page 411: ...fer to P 37B 6 7 10 ft lbs 9 1 4 N m 30 40 Nm 22 29 ft lbs 9 14 Nm 4 6 Nm 3 4 ft lbs 4 6 Nm 3 4 ft lbs nn 40 Nm 29 ft lbs 22 29 ft lbs Removal steps 1 Hose assembly 2 Clamp 3 Return pipe front right 4 Feed pipe front right 5 Hose assembly 6 Clamp and clip e l 7 Power steering gear box and control pipe connection l e 8 Control pipe and pressure tube connection 9 Pressure pipe assembly IO Suction ho...

Page 412: ...sure tube INSPECTION m37ocAA 0 Check tubes and pipes for cracking damage or corrosion l Check hoses for cracking damage leakage or fluid seepage l Check flare nuts for damage SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION M37ODAA 8 CONNECTION OF CONTROL PIPES AND PRESSURE TUBES Hold the hose with a wrench then connect the control pipes and pressure tubes Caution Ensure that the hose is not twisted 7 CONNECTION OF...

Page 413: ...bly Refer to GROUP 34 Rear Suspensior Assembly 19 28 Nm 14 20 ft lbs Post installation Operation Installation of Rear Suspension Assem bly Refer to GROUP 34 Rear Suspen sion Assembly Refill Power Steering Fluid Bleed Power Steering Fluid Line Refer to P 378 5 1 l 4WS Function Check Refer to P 37B 6 12 18 Nm 9 13 ft lbs k A Removal steps 1 Feed tube 2 O ring 3 Rear oil pump 4 O ring TSB Revision ...

Page 414: ...NOTES ...

Page 415: ...E AND LATCH 99 REAR DOOR MOULDING AND DRIP LINE WEATHERSTRIP 114 REAR DOOR TRIM AND WATER PROOF FILM 78 REAR WINDOW GLASS 72 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES 50 Door Fit Adjustment 51 Door Glass Adjustment 52 Hood Alignment Adjustment 50 Inside Handle Play Adjustment 52 Sunroof Fit Adjustment 53 Trunk Lid Adjustment 50 Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Adjustment 51 Water Test 52 SPECIAL TOOLS 5 SPECIFICATIONS 2...

Page 416: ...ront door glass mm in Rear door glass mm in Quarter window glass mm in Roof glass lid mm in iunroof motor Type Speed at no load vm Speed at load rpm At 1 Nm 72 ft lbs Bound current A Turning direction unroof switch Rated load current A Bound current A Front hinged sash construction Wire type Pin fork type Front hinged sash construction Wire type Pin fork type Single arm type Torsion bar type Adhes...

Page 417: ...ntact current A 22 Rated coil current A 0 135 0 215 Voltage drop between terminals V 0 2 or less At 12V and the rated load current oor lock control unit Effective voltage V IO 16 Current consumption when not in operation mA 3 or less oor lock power relay Range of voltage used V 8 16 Rated load current at 13 5V A 10 Rated coil current A Max 0 2 Voltage drop between terminals V 0 2 or less ront door...

Page 418: ...inge to door Door hinge to body SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES t Nm 7 11 9 1 4 9 1 4 IO 16 17 26 35 55 t ft lbs 5 8 7 10 7 10 7 12 12 19 25 40 Items Fender to body panel Splash shield to fender panel front bumper and front skirt panel Specified sealant and adhesive 3M ATD Part No 8646 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No 8625 or equivalent Door inner panel waterproof film fitting portion Sliding roof cable guide ...

Page 419: ... Adjustment of door fit Torsion bar remover Removal and installation of and installer Checking the power windows system the central door locking system and sunroof system ETACS input check For the number refer to GROUP NOTE 1 I 989 models 2 1990 1991 1992 1993 models TSB Revision ...

Page 420: ...not Adjust the alignment bumper or trunk lid Water leak from door cen er Correct or replace Jneven gap between ody Vind noise around door Incorrect door installation Weatherstrip hot holding firmly improperly installed weatherstrip or setting of weatherstrip Improperly closed door Improperly fit door Adjust position Adjust fit of door Repair or replace Adjust Adjust rTSB Revision ...

Page 421: ...ter lodged in guide rail Retighten or replace Check drive cable and guide rails for foreign matter Vlotor runs but lid does not move or moves only halfway Loose guide rails and lid Retighten Foreign matter lodged in guide rail Check drive cable and guide rails for foreign matter Incorrect engagement of motor Check for loose motor installation and pinion with drive cable damaged pinion Decrease in ...

Page 422: ...il a wind noise source is discovered 4 When such a place is found cover it again and continue with the procedure so as to determine if there are any other noise sources 5 If no others are found the last remaining tape is the only source 6 Cut the remaining piece of tape into smaller pieces attach it again as it was before and then remove the pieces one by one in the same way so as to narrow down t...

Page 423: ...IT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS 1989 models SUB FU IBLE LINK 1 8 q B IC 36 J B ST I DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT c 02 r O 2 7 DOOR LOCK RELAY c 73x 1xl2zzqy c 40 r 4 J B I I D 39 4 EF 4 EF m m FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE D 34 136 AC HY 104 N TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 424: ...ING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS 1989 models CONTINUED DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT RELAY FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE D 16 f7Ezzq D 20 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE D 32 1 REAR Dm ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 425: ...R LOCKING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS 1990 models J B1 10A LL DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT c 02 r yWKFUl IBLE d m Bl 1 C 36 I DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY 6 I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE D 34 35 AC Hlll2 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 426: ...UIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS 1990 models CONTINUED TSB Revision 5 5 ff ff 1 1 D 32 4 D 32 4 1 1 st Yt st Yt II 3 l 3 l D 23 cx D 23 cx DOOR LOCK imLoCK CONTROL UNIT FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR REAR Dm ACTUATOR REAR Dm RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE ...

Page 427: ...ACS From 1991 models J B IOD OR STORAGE CONNECTOR r I J B r DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT c 02 pkmiiq c 40 J B C XI L EBI 4 I 2 34 a r ml t e St A 07 2X iii59 1239 c 37 1 lzl 230 Of 2 7 I A UNLOCK DOOR LOCK RELAY c 73x I F rFi A FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE 35 AC Hll31 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 428: ...L DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS From 1991 models CONTINUED DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK CONTROL UNIT yLA TSB Revision FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR REAR Dm RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE ...

Page 429: ...L DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 42 15 Vehicles with ETACS 1989 models ETACS CONTROL UNIT r POWER RELAY C 18 FRONT SIDE m REVERSE SIDE fiTFm q F 3 AC HI 113 NY 33 F 7 I3 D 39 3 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 430: ... LOCKING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with ETACS 1989 models CONTINUED DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE ETACS CONTROL UNIT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE D 23 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE RI TSB Revision ...

Page 431: ...RAM Vehicles with ETACS 1990 models a I C 36 B 1 J B ETACS CONTROL UNIT r DATA LINK CONNECTOR c 18 FRONT SIDE 13 5 r NI V 3 6 126 124 29 0 15 a J _ _ _I 30 22 I m DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY c 73x I3 D 39 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE K35 AC H1114 NM TSB Revision ...

Page 432: ...TACS 1990 models CONTINUED ETACS CONTROL UNIT DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY D 32 EB 234 mt w 2 2 4 3 l D 14 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE J I REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE D 23 d 3 d 4 I 5 5 3 1 M REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision fIff S CONTROL v LIGHT F FRONT RIGHT SIDE ...

Page 433: ...with ETACS Non Turbo From 1991 models FUBKF IBLE 8 i B 0 0 10A 15A liEI c 37 1 l L 22 234 s 12 10 C 40 ni 2 pFrimz l z m IOD OR p STORAGE I CONNECTOR A 07 2X c 04 g G N D V 21 6 29 s 3 m J B DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY c 73x m I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE 3 D 39 D 34 TSB Revision ...

Page 434: ...TEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with ETACS Non Turbo From 1991 models CONTINUED DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY F RONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE S CONTROL v FRONT D 23 I 2 IED 3 4 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 435: ...AGRAM Vehicles with ETACS Turbo From 1991 models UWK 1 IBLE 8 J B 0 0 10A 15A E i c 37 1 l IP 34 IOD OR 4 STORAGE CONNECTOR A 07 2X i 3 ETACS CONTROL UNIT r II a I22 m Ll i a I I 6 D 39 ml C 18 D 34 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE 35 AC Hll33 NH TSB Revision ...

Page 436: ...ACS Turbo From 1991 models CONTINUED DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY ii5 I FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT GIDE D 20 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RIGHT SIDE D 23 liiEiil 1234 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LEFT SIDE l S CONTROL DIODE 0 C 46 2 JJL x Fx T 6s FRONT DOOR LIGHT L 1 GHT I I I RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 437: ...omentarily approx 0 5 second when inside 0 5v lock knob is pressed Usual Battery positive voltage 2 Inside door lock knob signal When inside lock knob is locked ov driver s side When inside lock knob is unlocked Battery positive voltage 3 Door lock relay activation signal Momentarily approx 0 5 second when inside 0 5V lock knob is pulled up Usual Battery positive voltage 4 Inside door lock knob si...

Page 438: ... r FRONT REAR LEFT 61DE RIGHT SIDE ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT 0 DOWN UP DOWN L FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH LI I AC H1 115 NY cl 4 D 17 2 J B REAR POWER C 38 D NI SUB I 2 El RIGHT SIDE D 18 34 1 P Em 345 m CL 3 34 m CL FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTER LEFT SIDE TSB Revision REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE ...

Page 439: ...roubleshooting 42 25 IBLE I t TION SWITCH WINDOW C 72X _ __ LJ CY EQL If f I If f I 1 e D 11 34 3 I 5 REAR POWER REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE 40 7 2 38 2 3 P 4 9 J B TSB Revision ...

Page 440: ...TACS 1990 models FRONT REAR LEFT SIDE RIGHT BID ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT L FRONT POWER MAIN SWITCH 0 P DOWN UP DOWN J B C 38 sr cu 3 3 4 91 cl F R O N T WINDOW MOTER 35 AC HllYB NY LEFT SIDE REAR POWER yMl HI SUB FlftT SIDE 1 e Em 345 REAR WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 441: ... FU IBLE LINK 2 d f i TION SWITCH x WINDOW C 72X El 34 J B m e II REAR FRONT FRONT POWER UJUl SUB I 2 ElFI D 11 345 D 30 REAR POWER REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE m C 4 C 3E 12 EB 34 3 IJ B 3 TSB Revision ...

Page 442: ...DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS From 1991 models r FRONT REAR LEFT GIDE RIGHT SIDE ONE TDUCH DOWN CIRCUIT r FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTER l5 AC Hll25 NY LEFT SIDE ON REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE m AJ 13 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 443: ... Troubleshooting NDOW C 72X ffl 34 I I 0 1 I UP DOWN UP DOWN I I I c3 I I I I REAR POWER f SUB LEFTD_G SDE 1 2 m 315 IJ B REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 444: ...HT SIDE ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT I T T 7 0 Mb 1 upI ADOWN UPA ADOWN FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH D 36 c c D 38 I I 9 m l4 64 z l 1 2 4 _____ z 5 i c C In FRONT POWER MOTOR 35AC HllY7 NW LEFT SIDE J B C 38 m CL 3 9 4 Ep cu REAR POWER WV SUB l I GF SIDE 1 2 fEl 305 D 17 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision I ...

Page 445: ... FRONT LEFT BIDE RIGHT SIDE UP DOWN UP DOWN 6 2 3513 s 51 2 da c13 Aa 5 10 v 4 ______ _ A 1 cb 4 D 30 1 B 2 REAR POWER REAR WINDOW MOTOR WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE D 05 r GND t D D l7l 2 rI i 23C 04 F 1 9 c 38 FRONT SIDE ml REVERSE SIDE pzl aq DATA LINK CONNECTOR FRONT DOOR LIGHT T F g D 24 I fXjHD FRONT DO R SWITCH LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE I TSB Revision I ...

Page 446: ...R ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT LEFT SIDE DOWN I RIGHT SIDE UP DOWN I FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH D 36 c C D 38 1 E l 2 r d 1 2 C C I cm D 15 lf Eza FRONT POWER POWER MOTOR REAR POWER 1 WINDOW SUB SWITCH R T T SIDE 1 2 m 345 D 17 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR 5 AC HlllB NW LEFT SIDE 1 TSB Revision RIGHT SIDE ...

Page 447: ...IDE RIGHT SIDE IGNITION SUB FU d IBLE LINK 1 Y8FH D 30 REAR POWER WINDOW SUB SWITCH LEFTDS E 1 II I I II REAR POWER REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE B REVERSE SIDE 7 T g yy HDUOR FRONT DOOR SWITCH LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 448: ...ETACS Non Turbo From 1991 models FRONT R E A R LEFT 6lDE RIGHT SIDE ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT 0 I FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH D 36 D 38 Y t 3 L 5 i J B C 38 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR D 7 1 IdI 2 REAR PO R WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE 35AC H1129 NN LEFT SIDE I I 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 449: ...43 1234 1 BE 35672 J B 2 c 04 z I F E m 28 36 a i cl REAR FRONT CLEFT BIDE I RIGHT BIDE ETACS S8TROL I G 5 33 29 I lb T m 8 J B F I i c j 1 J 30 __ _ 34 r23 FRONT DOOR I A P R L1Gi iT SWITCH REAR POWER WINDOW SUB SWITCH LEFTDs gE FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE f i SIDE D 30 m D 24 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 450: ...ETACS Turbo From 1991 models FRONT REAR ONE TOUCH DOWN CIRCUIT LEFT 6 I DE RIGHT SIDE I 1 T I 0 FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH D 36 D 38 C I OCK GWITCII ON t 9 m I4 cl 2 WINDOW MOTOR is AC HllJO Nu LEFT SIDE J B C 38 D 37 LI HEAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision ...

Page 451: ... B I s s I A3 A8 A5 I AlO __ _ _ e J REAR POWER Kl SUB LEFTD E D 30 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LEFT SIDE I I l I I I GND I F V _______ 3 FRONT POWER WINDOW SUB SWITCH D 11 p j L I FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RIGHT SIDE D 05 I Ql 2 IOD O R STORAGE s J B pgj3pg4 g ykH OiIR Fl HDOOR LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE DOOR ETACS SNRO TSB Revision ...

Page 452: ...hin 60 seconds if then left as is 1 Vehicles with ETACS l For models equipped with the ETACS the timer function permits the power window relay to remain ON for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is switched OFF If during that period of time the driver s door is opened the power window relay is switched OFF and the power windows can no longer be operated l Operations other than described above ar...

Page 453: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS Up to 1990 models Ef CL IGNITION SWITCH IG2 Kk J B r 0 IOA C 22r zq ij i I I ii I I I F j T BIBLE RTf iILI 3LA 7 20A a I I C 36 p El M4zEBoc IGHT I 234 EEL 9 c 37 567e 1 135 AC H1427 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 454: ...eshooting SUNROOF CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS Up to 1990 models CONTINUED J B SUNROOF POWER RELAY SUNROOF SWITCH z LIMIT SWITCH DOME LIGHT SUNROOF MOTOR TSB Revision D 09 D 06 D 07 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 ...

Page 455: ...GNITION WlTCH IG1 SUB FUSI TAILL IGHT RELAY r 1 FUSE DEDICATED J B r 10A 63 20A 7 C 42 g c 35 p Eq ETACS CONTROL g UNIT 16 I c 04 f l I fI J 30 s 23 i c 18 fFiJ REVERSE SIDE c _ 34 IT __FRONT DOOR LIGHT I ywI mm J B r J 2 D 24 CLEF SIDE RIG SIDE FRONT DObR SWITCH 35 AC H1428 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 456: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with ETACS Up to 1990 models CONTINUED J B KiE F RELAY r SUNROOF SWITCH SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH SUNROOF MOTOR 4Tr2 I 8 9 7 3 5 6 2 1 I DOME LIGHT D 09 D 06 D 07 IpEiq SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 457: ...CIRCUIT DIAGRAM BODY Troubleshooting 42 43 Vehicles without ETACS From 1991 models IGNI SWITi a 7 C IN IG2 SUB LINI 1 J B 0 10A D 38 DIODE 3IBLE TAILLIGHT RELAY I DEDICATED FUSE 10A 35 AC H1435 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 458: ...T DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS From 1991 models CONTINUED J B SUNROOF POWER RELAY r I 8 9 7 7 2 8 I I k GLIDE 1 I I 5 i TILT SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH DOME LIGHT SUNROOF MOTOR D 09 D 06 ip7tq D 07 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 459: ...odels IGNITION J B c IOA c 39 ETACS CONTROL g UNIT WITCH IG3 SUB FUSIBLE LINK TAILL 7 c 43 20A 7 IOD OR STORAGE CONNECTOR A 07 2X RIG SIh FRONT DOOR SWITCH DATA LINK CONNECTOR C 18 FRONT SIDE p g GFRm D B 1 ___ 29 3oJ G 3 c 40 I J B i c 43 IGHT RELAY 3 cd l A cu s 35 AC Hl440 NY TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 460: ...UIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with ETACS Non Turbo From 1991 models CONTINUED E F RELAY Q tc Ld 8 Y v v V I 9 7 3 5 6 2 1 a 1 I 0 SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH SUNROOF MOTOR DOME LIGHT D 09 D 06 D 07 p q 1 IQ 2 SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY D 03 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 461: ... ETACS Turbo From 1991 models IGNITlON z cu J B r IOA c 39 z ETACS CONTROL z UNIT DIODE 46 2 I r IIITCH IG1 SUB FUSIBLE LINK I z Lh a B I l C 36 TAILLI I I n I II 1 ____ _1 REVERSE SIDE FRONT DOOR SWITCH H T RELAY J 6 C 37 l 2 c 35 pgjq X35 AC ti1442 NN TSB Revision ...

Page 462: ...oting SUNROOF CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with ETACS Turbo From 1991 models CONTINUED r t t J f n YELAY FLAY 7r I i 7 td TSB Revision ti 2 J I I SUNROOF SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH SUNROOF MOTOR DOME LIGHT SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY ...

Page 463: ...at a point before fully closed and will not continue closing To close it fully release the switch once and then press and hold it again Vehicles with ETACS l For models equipped with the ETACS the timer function permits the sunroof power relay to remain ON for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is switched OFF If during that period of time the driver s door is opened the sunroof power relay is s...

Page 464: ...ent of the hood striker and the hood latch by adjusting the horizontal and vertical position of the latch and the height of the hood TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT WFBAC 1 Loosen the trunk lid mounting bolts adjust the trunk lid by moving it so that the clearance is equal on all sides 2 Turn the trunk lid bumpers either left or right to adjust the height of the trunk lid 3 Loosen the trunk lid striker mount...

Page 465: ... lower part disconnect the trunk lid torsion bar from the link Caution Be sure to install the special tool securely because damage may be caused to the body or to other components etc if the trunk lid torsion bar separates from the special tool 4 Take out the trunk lid torsion bar from the trunk lid torsion bar holes in the trunk lid hinges 5 Change the installation hole and then install the trunk...

Page 466: ... the forward backward position of the glass INSIDE HANDLE PLAY ADJUSTMENT M4ZFGAC 1 Remove the door trim and waterproof film Refer to P 42 76 78 2 Move the door inside handle installation position back and forth to adjust so that the inside handle play allowance agrees with the standard value Standard value A 4 10 mm 16 40 in WATER TEST M42FFAs 1 Close roof lid tightly 2 Hold hose upward and adjus...

Page 467: ...y s quide and the link s reference hole are positionally aligned NOTE If the condition is not corrected by only an adjustment by the installation nut there is a deviation of the fully closed position of the roof glass lid and the motor s fully closed position so remove and check the motor If the roof and roof glass lid are not parallel correct as follows 1 If the deviation is approximately 1 mm 04...

Page 468: ...height of the roof and the roof glass lid must be adjusted do so as follows 1 Close the roof glass lid to the fully tilt closed position 2 Open the sun shade completely 3 Remove the side garnish 4 Loosen the six nuts 5 Adjust by increasing or decreasing the number of adjustment plates 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 469: ...itch AWD Turbo 6 Hood insulator 7 Hood latch 8 Hood lock release handle Hood lock release cable removal steps 9 Hood lock release cable protector 10 Hood lock release cable Hood removal steps 11 Connection for washer tube and nozzle Hood hinge removal steps 12 Hood 13 Front deck garnish Refer to GROUP 51 Garnishes 14 Hood hinge 12 Hood TSB Revision I ...

Page 470: ...of the windshield glass remove the hood Caution If the hood s edge part strikes the lower edge of the windshield glass forcefully there is the danger of breaking the windshield glass so the hood must be removed carefully INSPECTION HOOD SWITCH 1 Disconnect the hood switch connector 2 Check the continuity between the terminal Cl NOTE O O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals TSB ...

Page 471: ...lock cylinder 4WD Turbo 9 Locking plate l 10 Bumper 1 1 Trunk lid weatherstrip 12 Trunk lid I 13 Trunk lid torsion bar Trunk lid lock release cable removal steps 14 Front seat driver s side Refer to GROUP 52 Front Seat 15 Rear seat Refer to GROUP 52 Rear Seat 16 Front scuff plate driver s side i Refer to GROUP 17 Rear scuff plate 52 Trims driver s side 18 Rear end trim cover 19 Trunk lid lock rele...

Page 472: ...rsion bar sepa rates from the special tool 4 Take out the trunk lid torsion bar from the trunk lid torsion bar holes in the trunk lid hinges INSPECTION TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH 1 Unlock the trunk lid latch 2 Check the continuity between the terminals Terminal Trunk lid latch locked 1 2 Trunk lid latch unlocked NOTE 0 0 O O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals TRUNK LID LOCK CYLIN...

Page 473: ... the link by twisting the trunk lid torsion bar hook to the holder Caution Be sure to install the special tool securely because damage may be caused to the body or to other components etc if the trunk lid torsion bar sepa rates from the special tool Trunk lid torsion bar I Holder Trunk lid torsion bar MB991 244 18AO284 Trunk lid pane J P T COK V G Bumper nm in 18AOO60 10 INSTALLATION OF BUMPER Ins...

Page 474: ...ase cable removal steps 4 Trunk side trim Refer to GROUP 52 Trims 6 Front seat driver s side Refer to GROUP 52 Front Seat 18Ao273 4 18AO774 1 7 Rear seat Refer to GROUP 52 Rear Seat 8 Front scuff plate driver s side 1 Refer to GROUP 9 Rear scuff plate driver s side 52 Trims 10 Fuel filler door lock release cable Fuel filler door lock release handle removal steps 6 Front seat driver s side Refer to...

Page 475: ...T D P a r t No 8646 o r equivalent WA0340 Removal steps 1 Fender garnish Refer to GROUP 51 Garnish 2 Side protect moulding Refer to GROUP 51 Mouldings 3 Splash shield 4 Front bumper Refer to GROUP 51 Bumper 5 Front combination light 6 Front fender panel TSB Revision I ...

Page 476: ...42 62 BODY Loose Panel LOOSE PANEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION I Grille filler panel Hood lock support 18AO773 stav TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 477: ...ane Part No 8609 or equivalent Primer 3M Super Fast Urethane Primer Part No 8608 or equivalent Reserve items Dispensing nozzle Wire dia x length Adhesive gun Isopropyl alcohol Wiping rags Isopropyl alcohol Glass holder Spacers Service Part Window moulding assembly Service Part Tectyl 506T Valvoline Oil Company Applications for cutting adhesive for adhesive application for cleaning jointing surface...

Page 478: ...Flnishlng of adhewe r Glass I i i 7 Cleaning of glass I I __ _ ___ __ 1 Painting thlnner I i I Isopropyl alcohol Leave for 3 min or more I I A Marklng of relation ship of glass to body Isopropyl alcohol Leave for 5 min TSB Revision 11 f e g o f attachlng I Cleaning of glass and oalnted surface Isopropyl alcohol I ...

Page 479: ...MOULDINGS WZlABBb 1 To cut the existing adhesive make a tool such as the one shown 2 Using the recommended tool scoop out the old adhesive material at the clip installation Caution Be careful not to damage the glass and body 3 Apply the specified adhesive and install the moulding Specified adhesive 3M Super Fast Urethan Part No 8609 or equivalent 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 480: ...val steps I Roof rail trim Refer to GROUP 52 Headlining 2 yryotsyillar trim Refer to GROUP 52 3 Wrper blade and arm assembltes 4 Front headlining trim Refer to GROUP 52 Headlining 5 Sunvisor 6 Inside rear view mirror 7 Front deck garnish 8 Glass holder plate e C 9 Windshield side moulding and corner joint assembly 10 Window moulding clip B 11 Windshield upper moulding 12 Window moulding clip A l l...

Page 481: ...oth ends of the piano wire from inside the vehicle through the 2 holes at top and bottom 3 Wrap both ends of the piano wire around a piece of wood 4 From the outside pull the piano wire alternately along the windshield glass to cut the adhesive Caution In order to protect the body from damage apply cloth tape to all body areas around the installed glass before cutting the adhesive 5 Make mating ma...

Page 482: ...ss both to the inside surface and the edge of the glass 2 Allow to dry for five minutes Specified primer 3M Super Fast Urethane Primer Part No 8608 or equivalent 3 Using a sharp knife remove old adhesive on the body opening pinch weld flange evenly to thickness of within 2 mm j 08 in all around 4 Finish the flange surface so that they are smooth Caution Be careful not to remove more adhesive than ...

Page 483: ...t s Caution If it is necessary to move the vehicle move it slowly 10 Using a clean lint free cloth liberally dampened with isopropyl alcohol wipe away dirt from the glass perimeter and the body INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELD WITH NEW ADHESIVE ONLY This method is recommended if there is considerable loss of adhesion between the old adhesive material and the body opening or body opening requires repair ...

Page 484: ...gs 2 q 3 5 4 1 18A0713 Pre removal and Post installation Removal steps Ce l I Quarter window glass moulding and glass assembly 2 Quarter window glass l 3 Protector B 4 Protector A 5 Quarter window glass moulding M42LEALa I 18A0120 Adhesive 3M Super Fast Urethan Part No 8889 or equivalent SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 1 REMOVAL OF QUARTER WINDOW GLASS MOULD ING AND GLASS ASSEMBLY 1 Remove the nuts at t...

Page 485: ...any adhesive remaining on the body flange part and at the quarter window glass side and then use isopropyl alcohol to remove any grease or oil at the body side and at the quarter window glass side 2 Apply a coating of the specified adhesive all around at the place shown in the illustration on the glass side and then install to the body Specified adhesive 3M Super Fast Urethan Part No 8609 or equiv...

Page 486: ...52 Trims 6 Rear window defogger harness connector 7 Rear window lower moulding 8 Rear window side moulding and corner I joint assembly 9 Rear window upper moulding 10 Window moulding clip 11 Window glass spacer I l 12 Rear window glass 13 Window dam 7 REMOVAL OF REAR WlNDbW LOWER MOULDING I Open the trunk lid and remove the rear window lower moulding installation screws 2 Separate the rear window ...

Page 487: ...the corner joint assembly and the rear window upper moulding 12 REMOVAL OF REAR WINDOW GLASS Remove in the same way as the windshield glass Refer to P 42 66 SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 13 INSTALLATION OF WINDOW DAM Install in the same way as the windshield glass Refer to P 42 66 12 INSTALLATION OF REAR WINDOW GLASS Install in the same way as the windshield glass Refer to P 42 66 TSB Revision ...

Page 488: ...side trim front door 3 Rear scuff plate rear door 4 Center pillar lower trim rear door I Refer to GROUP 52 Trims 5 Connection for door wiring harness connector 6 Spring pin 7 Door assembly 8 Upper hinge 9 Lower hinge 10 Door check strap Striker removal steps 11 Striker 12 Striker shim Door switch removal steps 13 Door switch cap 14 Door switch TSB Revision ...

Page 489: ... Open ON 0 0 0 S w i t c h Depressed OFF TYPE B Open ON 0 0 Switch Depressed OFF TSB Revision I DOOR CHECK STRAP REPLACEMENT 1 Press upward and remove spring pin 2 Remove door check strap bolt Remove door check strap 3 With the identification mark upward install door check strap Applicable location R H Front door L H Identification mark KR KL Rear door R H MR L H ML ...

Page 490: ...a cover 2 Door light 3 Power window main switch 4 Power window sub switch a 5 Clip 6 Escutcheon 7 Regulator handle 8 Armrest 9 Door grip 10 Inside handle cover l 11 Door trim 12 Door pocket 13 Door speaker garnish vehicles with door speaker 14 Waterproof film ISA0269 Vehicles without power window l640270 14 Adhesive 3M ATD Part No 8625 or equivalent NOTE 0 Hook positions TSB Revision ...

Page 491: ...nstallation screw 2 To unhook the hooked part of the door trim press the trim toward the door panel and while doing so pull upward to remove SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 11 INSTALLATION OF DOOR TRIM 1 While fitting the door trim upper edge inner weather strip clip to the door panel fit the hook part of the trim into the hole in the panel and then move it downward to install 2 Install the door tr...

Page 492: ... with power window without power window 16AOOO2 Adhesive 3M ATD Part No 8625 or equivalent Removal steps 1 Door light 2 Ashtray 3 Power window subswitch I 4 Clip 5 Regulator handle 6 Escutcheon 7 Armrest 8 Door grip 9 Inside handle cover l l C 10 Door trim 11 Waterproof film 7 4 6 NOTE e Hook positions TSB Revision J ...

Page 493: ...llation screw 2 To unhook the hooked part of the door trim press the trim toward the door panel and while doing so pull upward to remove SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 10 INSTALLATION OF DOOR TRIM 1 While fitting the door trim upper edge inner weather strip clip to the door panel fit the hook part of the trim into the hole in the panel and then move it downward to install 2 Install the door trim i...

Page 494: ...indow 5 Vehicles with power window 5 Vehicles without power window lSAOl77 Removal steps 1 Delta cover 2 Door trim and waterproof film Refer tO P 42 76 l 4 Door window glass adjustment 41 I 3 Door window glass 4 Door glass holder 4 5 Front window regulator NOTE 0 Hook positions Vehicles without power window 18AO125 TSB Revision ...

Page 495: ... and then remove the regulator from the access hole in the door panel INSPECTION POWER WINDOW MOTOR 1 Connect the battery directly to the motor terminals and check that the slider moves smoothly 2 Also when the polarity of the battery is changed check that the slider moves in the opposite direction CIRCUIT BREAKER INCORPORATED IN THE POWER WIN DOW MOTOR 1 Press the UP switch to fully close the win...

Page 496: ...ass correctly contacts the door glass runchannel when the door window glass is fully raised and lowered if a problem is found adjust by following the procedures described below 1 Loosen the installation bolt of the front window regulator assembly 2 Move the upper installation part of the front window regulator assembly forward and backward to adjust the tilt angle of the glass 3 Lower the door win...

Page 497: ...ta assembly e l c 3 Door window glass 4 4 Door glass holder 5 Rear window regulator assembly NOTE Lo v nooK positions Vehicles with power window 1 Vehicles without power window Rear door rear delta assembly SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 2 REMOVAL OF REAR DOOR REAR DELTA ASSEMBLY 1 Remove the rear door inner opening weatherstrip only at the rear door lower sash part 2 Remove the rear door lower sash in...

Page 498: ...e the regulator from the access hole in the door panel INSPECTION POWER WINDOW MOTOR 1 Connect the battery directly to the motor terminals and check that the slider moves smoothly 2 Also when the polarity of the batten is changed check that the slider moves in the opposite direction CIRCUIT BREAKER INCORPORATED IN THE POWER WIN DOW MOTOR 1 Press the UP switch to fully close the window glass and co...

Page 499: ...contacts the door glass runchannel when the door window glass is fully raised and lowered if a problem is found adjust by following the procedures described below 1 Loosen the installation bolt of the rear window regula tor assembly 2 Move the upper installation part of the rear window regulator assembly forward and backward to adjust the tilt angle of the glass 3 Lower the door window glass to th...

Page 500: ...und check for a malfunction of that switch or for damaged or disconnected wiring l Ignition switch l Front door switch TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK REFERENCE TABLE ETACS RELATED PROBLEMS ONLY For information concerning the locations of electrical compo nents refer to P 42 93 1 Problem 1 Probable cause j Check method Remedy The power windows do not oper Damaged or discon If a malfunction is in ate when th...

Page 501: ...n 30 seconds front door switch Malfunction of the Replace the electron electronic control unit ic control unit The opening and closing opera Short circuit of the Check by following in Repair the wiring har ions of the power windows are power window relay dividual part and cir ness or replace the 3ossible after the timer operation activation circuit cuit check No 3 pro imc has elapsed when the igni...

Page 502: ...If there is an abnormal condition of the power supp ly circuit other ETACS functions also will not operate Checking the ground circuit Disconnect the connector and check the wiring harness side I I I ECU terminal No Signal Condition Terminal voltage 36 Electronic control unit power At all times B SUPPlY B Battery Positive Voltage Checking the ground circuit Disconnect the connector and check the w...

Page 503: ...s the sen unit when the ignition switch is switched to the ding of HIGH level signals to the electronic control ACC position or the ON position Electronic control unit terminal voltage Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal No 1Signal 3 1 Ignition switch ON I Condition Ignition switch Standard I OFF ov ON I I B Battery Positive Voltag...

Page 504: ...UP I1 2 Lock swtch 8 i m I 1 2 2 I 2 7 T t t 0 1 L L 1 1 I 2 I t Rear iLHl Rear RHI Front RHI Power window rmxor 16IO515 I I Front ILHI 2 2 From 1990 models J 3 The symbol indicates that the connector designated by that sym bol is also the same connector for the front right rear right and rear left 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 505: ...ough sub fusible link No 2 to power window switch and motor as a result of the switch ON of the power window relay NOTE The power supply to the power window relay is stopped if a front door is opened within 30 seconds after the ignition switch is switched to OFF Electronic control unit terminal voltage Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side 1 ECU ...

Page 506: ... ECU terminal No Signal Condition Terminal voltage 33 Driver door switch signal Driver door Open Closed o v 5V 34 Passenger door switch signal Passenger door Closed 5v Checking the driver door switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal No Connected to measured part Tester Measurement connection Check conditions Standard I 3...

Page 507: ...ON 16AO269 1 Power window main switch 2 Power window sub switch 3 Instrument under cover assembly I989 models or knee protector assembly From 1990 models Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Panel 4 Power window relay 5 ETACS control unit DOHC TSB Revision ...

Page 508: ...switch INSPECTION POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection table 1 b 3ear 8 0 0 RH 9 9 11 9 0 9 4 9 T 0 0 1 6 0 NOTE 0C Indicates that there is continuity between the terminals 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 509: ...ow 42 95 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection 2 I 1 gl 4 8J 3 POWER WINDOW RELAY Apply battery voltage to terminal 2 and check for continuity when terminal 4 is grounded I 2 3 I 4 Continuity no voltage 0 0 Continuity with voltage 0 0 JOTE O O indicates that there is continuity between the termrnals TSB Revision 18LO344 ...

Page 510: ...m Refer to P 42 76 3 Inside rock knob l Inside handle play adjustment 4 Door window glass Refer to P 42 81 5 Door inside handle 6 Front door lock actuator 7 Door latch assembly 8 Door latch switch From 1990 models LA A m 10 Door outside handle cover e l 11 Door outside handle 12 Packing A 13 Packing B 4 14 Door outside handle base 15 Connection of door harness and door lock cylinder AWD Turbo 16 D...

Page 511: ...n screw then move it slightly toward the front and remove INSPECTION FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR 1 Place the rod in the LOCK position apply the battery power to the terminal 3 and check to see that when the terminal 1 is grounded the rod moves to the UNLOCK position 2 Then place the rod in the UNLOCK position apply the battery power to the terminal 1 and check to see that when the terminal 3 is groun...

Page 512: ...nder locked NOTE 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 C O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 11 INSTALLATION OF DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE Install the door outside handle by sliding it to the door outside handle base NOTE When installing the fulcrum part of the door outside handle to the pin part of the door outside handle base the work can be made easier by lifting the leve...

Page 513: ... 1 Door trim and waterproof film Refer to P 4278 2 Inside lock knob 4 Inside handle play adjustment 3 Rear door rear delta assembly Refer to P 42 83 4 Door window glass Refer to P 42 84 5 Door inside handle 6 Front door lock actuator 9 Door outside handle cover e l 10 Door outside handle 11 Packing A 12 Packing B c 13 Door outside handle base c 7 Door latch assembly 8 Retainer NOTE 0 Hook position...

Page 514: ... 1 2 Place the rod in the LOCK position apply the battery power to the terminal 3 and check to see that when the terminal 1 is grounded the rod moves to the UNLOCK position Then place the rod in the UNLOCK position apply the battery power to the terminal l and check to see that when the terminal 3 is grounded the rod moves to the LOCK position TSB Revision SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 10 INSTALL...

Page 515: ...nnected wiring l Door lock actuator switch front door l Front door switch l Key reminder switch removal insertion of ignition key NOTE When checking the key reminder switch use the included battery harness to take power directly from the battery TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK REFERENCE TABLE ETACS RELATED PROBLEMS ONLY For information concerning the locations of electrical compo nents refer to P 42 109 CEN...

Page 516: ...ed into the ignition switch Key reminder switch OFF A front door is open Front door switch ON The central door locking function owever functions normally I 1 i I Probable cause Short circuit of the lighting monitor switch input circuit Shot circuit of the lighting monitor switch Damaged or discon nected wiring of the Front door switch in out circuit lamaged or discon iected wiring of the ront door...

Page 517: ...he battery If there is an abnormal condition of the power supp ly circuit other ETACS functions also will not operate Electronic control unit voltage connection status of the electronic control unit connector Terminal ECU terminal No Signal Condition I voltage 36 Electronic control unit power At all times B suPPlY B Battery Positive Voltage Checking the ground circuit Disconnect the connector and ...

Page 518: ...arm Door lock Door lock actuator actuator switch Driver side door and 1993 models 3 1991 1992 models with the1 t alarm actuator actuator switch 1 Passenger side door Description of operation When a front door is locked by the lock knob or the key the door lock actuator switch is switched OFF and HIGH level signals are sent to the electronic control unit These signal activate the timer circuit of t...

Page 519: ...k actuator switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal Tester I No Connected to measured part Measurement I 1 connection i 1 22 Door lock actuator switch driver Resistance door signal 1 22 ground I Check conditions Standard I I 21 Door lock actuator switch passenger door signal Resistance 21 ground Door lock actuator Lock OF...

Page 520: ...ocking the door lock actuator When with the ignition key inserted a front door is opened and is locked transistor Tr2 unlock side of the electronic control unit is switched ON and the door lock relay is activated thus unlocking the door lock actuator Electronic control unit voltage connection status of the electronic control unit connector ECU terminal No I Signal Condition 24 Door lock relay lock...

Page 521: ...itch input circuit there will also be an abnormal condition of the key reminder buzzer Electronic control unit voltage connection status of the electronic control unit connector ECU terminal No Signal Condition j Terminal voltage 6 Key reminder switch signal Key removed ov Key inserted l5V Checking the key reminder switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check th...

Page 522: ...ndition Terminal voltage Open o v 3 3 Driver door switch signal Driver door Closed 5v Open o v 34 i Passenger door switch signal j Passenger door Closed 5v Checking the driver door switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal I No Connected to measured part T e s t e r Measurement connection Check conditions I Standard I 33 D...

Page 523: ...ck relay 3 Door lock control unit or ETACS control unit lflA0061 INSPECTiON DOOR LOCK RELAY Check for continuity between terminals under the conditions described below 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Continuity no voltage 0 0 u o 0 0 0 0 Continuity with voltage u o 0 _ _ __ _ o o e NOTE 1 O O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals 2 O 4 indicates terminals to which battery voltage is applied TSB R...

Page 524: ...elta cover 2 Door trim and waterproof film Refer to P 42 76 78 3 Rear door delta assembly Refer to P 42 83 4 Door window glass assembly Refer to P 42 81 84 l 5 Door window glass runchannel Vehicles with power window Vehicles without Vehicles with Dower window W 2 Vehicles without NOTE 0 Hook positions TSB Revision ...

Page 525: ...NSTALLATION 5 INSTALLATION OF DOOR WINDOW GLASS RUNCHAN NEL Remove the dual surface tape from the places shown in the figure Then attach new dual surface tape thickness 6 mm 24 in width IO mm 4 in length 100 mm 4 0 in and install the runchannel to the door TSB Revision ...

Page 526: ...th power window Vehicles without power window Opening weatherstrip removal steps 1 Door sash moulding 2 Dqor inner opening weatherstrip l e 3 Door outer opening weatherstrip Belt line moulding removal steps 4 Delta cover 5 Door mirror 6 c 6 Door trim and waterproof film Refer to P 42 76 7 Belt line moulding NOTE 0 Clip or hook positions TSB Revision ...

Page 527: ...ip from the door panel 3 Except for the front end clip unhook the clips from the door panel NOTE Unhook while pressing the moulding s clip places from the outside by a finger or use a flat tip screwdriver or a similar tool to pry at the places shown in the illustration 4 Remove the belt line moulding by sliding it toward the front of the vehicle SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION OF DOO...

Page 528: ...without power window 3pening weatherstrip removal steps 1 Door sash moulding 2 Door inner opening weatherstrip c c 3 Door outer opening weatherstrip 3elt line moulding removal steps 4 Door trim and waterproof film Refer to P 42 78 j 5 Rear door delta assembly Refer to P 42 8 1 l 6 Door window glass Refer to P 42 84 7 Belt line moulding NOTE 0 Clip or hook positions TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 529: ...oor panel NOTE Unhook while pressing the moulding s clip places from the outside by a finger or use a flat tip screwdriver or a similar tool to pry at the places shown in the illustration 4 Remove the belt line moulding by sliding it toward the front of the vehicle Belt line moulding I CG Clip grhove I SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION OF DOOR OUTER OPENING WEATHER STRIP The clip colou...

Page 530: ...ck by following indi Repair the wiring har netted wiring of the vidual part and the circuit ness or replace the sunroof power relay check No 3 procedures sunroof power relay activation circuit P 42 119 Malfunction of the elec Replace the electron tronic control unit ic control unit The opening and closing operations Damaged or disconnect If a malfunction is indicated Repair the wiring har of the s...

Page 531: ...s an abnormal condition of the power supply circuit other ETACS functions also will not operate Electronic control unit voltage connection status of the electronic control unit connector ECU terminal No Signal Condition Terminal voltage 36 Electronic control unit power SWDIY At all times B B Battery Positive Voltage Checking the ground circuit Disconnect the connector and check the wiring harness ...

Page 532: ...ion A condition for operation of this system is the control unit when the ignition switch is switched to sending of HIGH level signals to the electronic the ACC position or the ON position Electronic control unit terminal voltage Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal No Signal 3 Ignition switch ON Condition Ignition switch OFF ON Ter...

Page 533: ...ACTIVATION CIRCUIT Up to 1990 models Sub fusible link Junction block Sunroof power relay ETACS control unit ECU Sunroof control relay I IIt a 9 7 10 I Sunroof control relay 1 1 Sunroof Limit switch w W Sunroof motor 16AO512 TSB Revision ...

Page 534: ...unroof From 1991 models Sub fusible link I Junction block IOD or storage connector ETACS control unit ECU Sunroof control relaj Sunroof switch z Limit switch Sunroof motor 16A1230 IOD lgnltlon Off Draw TSB Revision ...

Page 535: ...itched ON and battery voltage is supplied from NOTE the battery through sub fusible link No 1 to the The power supply to the sunroof power relay is sunroof power relay stopped if a front door is opened within 30 seconds after the ignition switch is switched to OFF Electronic control unit terminal voltage Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU ...

Page 536: ...ntrol unit connector ECU terminal No Signal Condition Terminal voltage 33 Driver door switch signal Driver door Open o v Closed 5V 34 Passenger door switch signal Passenger door Open ov Closed 5V Checking the front door switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal No Connected to measured part Measurement Tester connection Ch...

Page 537: ...ly 4 9 Headlining For installation refer to GROUP 52 Headlining e I 10 Motor l 4 1 1 Sliding roof assembly I 13 Drain hose 14 Housing assembly 15 Front set bracket 16 Rear set bracket Motor removal steps 8 Sunroof switch and dome light assembly 4 9 Headlining For installation refer to GROUP 52 Headlining 4e l 10 Motor Power relay and sunroof control relay removal steps 8 Sunroof switch and dome li...

Page 538: ... to the fully closed position 2 Remove the roof drip rear channel REMOVAL OF HEADLINING Refer to GROUP 52 Headlining NOTE To remove the motor sunroof power relay and sunroof control relay remove after simply lowering the front part of the headlining If the housing assembly is also to be removed remove the headlining 10 REMOVAL OF MOTOR Caution If the motor is to be removed be sure to first move th...

Page 539: ... CHECKING THE SLIDING RESISTANCE OF THE GLASS LID Check the sliding resistance of the roof glass lid by following the procedures below 1 Remove the side garnish 2 Loosen the nut at the front end of the roof glass lid installation and then tie with a cord 3 Remove the motor after opening the roof glass lid 4 Using a spring scale measure the sliding resistance of the roof glass lid Standard value 12...

Page 540: ...escribed below 1 Adjust the tightening torque of the bolt within the tightening torque range indicated in the illustration 2 Remove the bolt and reduce the number of shims Drive gear n _imit switch 2 Limit switch 18A02 CHECKING THE MOTOR Check the direction of rotation of the drive gear when the bat tery is connected to the connector I Terminal 1 i Terminal 2 Drive gear rotation direction 1 i Left...

Page 541: ... between the terminals 2 8 indicates terminals to which battery voltage is applied CHECKING THE SUNROOF CONTROL RELAY 1 Remove the limit switch from the motor 2 Connect the limit switch and the wiring harness connector 3 Switch ON the ignition switch 4 Connect the tester to each terminal and to body ground as shown in the table below and then check the voltage and check for continuity 5 When insta...

Page 542: ...the tilt switch 6 i 7 Usually I Batten Positive Voltage 1 Replace the control relay or the mot01 Tilt down o v Check the harness between the I 1 control relay and ground Check the tilt switch I 9 Usually I 1 Battery Positive Voltage I Replace the control relay or the motor i Slide open Iov Check the harness between the I control relay and ground Check the slide switch r r r 8 9 10 11 13 7 L I L 4 ...

Page 543: ...N OF SLIDING ROOF ASSEMBLY Following the sequence described below fully tilt close the left and right 1 Slide the sliding roof drive cable assembly so that the notches in the guide rail are as indicated in the illustration 2 With a finger at the place indicated by A in the illustration slide the link forward and align the guide and the link s reference hole 10 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR Following the s...

Page 544: ...42 130 BODY Sunroof REASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY Disasserr dy steps 1 Sun shade 2 Stopper l 3 Sliding roof drive cable assembly l 4 Guide rail 5 Sliding roof cable guide casing TSB Revision ...

Page 545: ...finger at the B part slide toward the rear Caution Be careful not to lose the sliding shoes plastic SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 5 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVE TO SLIDING ROOF CABLE GUIDE CASING 4 GUIDE RAIL Apply a coating of adhesive to the seal at the coupling and to the cut part of the weatherstrip Specified adhesive 3M ATD Part No 8625 or equiva lent Caution If too much adhesive is applied adhes...

Page 546: ...NOTES ...

Page 547: ...LS BUMPER 7 SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications DOOR MIRROR 33 Sealant and Adhesives FRONT GRILLE 12 Service Specifications GARNISHES 13 Torque Specifications TROUBLESHOOTING MOULDINGS 15 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER 20 REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR SWITCH 34 ...

Page 548: ...ntinuous use With washer fluid Empty operation Nozzle jet pressure Tank capacity iRliper relay Vehicles with ETACS Range of voltage used Voltage drop between terminals lemote control mirror Remote control mirror motor Bound current Door mirror control switch Rated load Specifications Ferrite magnet type Third brush system Dynamic brake system rpm 48 4 68 g 5 N m ft lbs 1 2 1 15 5 A 3 7 or less 80 ...

Page 549: ... wiper linkage mounting bolt Windshield wiper arm locking nut Nm 19 28 4 6 10 16 ft lbs 74 20 2 9 4 3 7 2 12 SEALANT AND ADHESIVES Items Specified sealant and adhesive Side Garnish Side Protect Moulding 3M ATD Part No 6382 width 12 mm l 2 in or 3M ATD Part No 6383 width 22 mm 7 8 in or equivalent SPECIAL TOOLS I IDA tester MUT ROM pack For the number refer to GROUP 00 Precautions Before Service 1 ...

Page 550: ...CUIT DIAGRAM IGNITZLTCH ACC 3 c 43 0 15A 0 d s COLUMN SWITCH INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY OFF ON I I a 5 2 _ l3 5 2 3 g 2 C 08 I I VARIABLE INTERMlTTENT WIPER CONTROL SW ITCH n KEW A 51 a h I Remark i n d i c a t e s v e h i c l e s w i t h v a r i a b l e i n t e r m i t t e n t wiper SS AC H1324 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 551: ...her wiper operation l When the washer switch is turned ON the intermittent wiper relay contacts close causing wipers to cycle two to three times TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1 Wipers do not operate 1 Washer is not operative either l Check multi purpose fuse No l Check ground 2 Low speed or high speed wiper operation only is inoperative l Check wiper switch 3 Wipers do not stop l Check wiper motor l Check...

Page 552: ...SYSTEM OPERATION l When the remote controlled mirror switch is operated while the ignition key is in ACC or ON position current flows through fuse No remote controlled mirror switch remote control mirror remote controlled mirror switch and ground causing the mirror to move TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Neither right nor left mirror operates 1 Also cigarette lighter does not operate l Check fuse 2 Cigarett...

Page 553: ...t bumper removal steps 1 Splash shield 2 Front turn signal lights 3 Fog light Turbo 4 Front bumper face coupling clip 5 Front bumper face coupling screw 6 Front bumper face coupling bolt 7 Front bumper reinforcement coupling bolt 8 Front bumper reinforcement coupling nut 9 Front bumper assembly 19 28Nm 14 20 ftlbs TSB Revision ...

Page 554: ... Trunk Rear Trim and Trunk Side Trim Refer to GROUP 52 Trims w 1 6 I I Rear bumper removal steps 10 Rear side markers 11 Rear bumper face coupling bolt s 12 Rear bumper face coupling bolt s 13 Rear bumper reinforcement coupling bolt 14 Rear bumper reinforcement coupling nut FWD 15 Rear bumper stay plates FWD 16 Rear bumper stay reinforcement AWD 17 Rear bumper assembly 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 555: ...rackets 3 License plate bracket Turbo 5 Front bumper reinforcement 6 Front bumper core 7 Front bumper upper side plates 8 Front bumper upper center plate 9 Fog light bracket 10 Duct cover 11 Front bumper face WA1009 12 Front bumper light brackets 13 License plate bracket Non Turbo 14 License plate support brackets l 15 Front bumper moulding TSB Revision ...

Page 556: ...OR Bumper Turbo 18Ao881 tDJ21 Rear 18A0331 Rear bumper disassembly steps 16 Rear bumper side reinforcement 17 Rear bumper lower plates 18 Rear bumper reinforcement 19 Rear bumper core 20 Rear bumper face I 21 Rear bumper moulding ...

Page 557: ...the top SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY 15 ADHESION OF FRONT BUMPER MOULDING Zl REAR BUMPER MOULDING 1 Use isopropyl alcohol to clean away any oil or grease from the bumper moulding installation surface of the bumper 2 Peel away the paper from the bumper moulding and then install the bumper moulding so that it is aligned with the groove for bumper moulding installation TSB Revision ...

Page 558: ...rille 2 Top mark 3 Clips 18A0820 18A0821 1993 models FWD M T AWD Non Turbo Turbo 18AO324 18A1008 SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 1 REMOVAL OF RADIATOR GRILLE While carefully pulling the radiator grille outward use a flat tip screwdriver to push the tab part of the clips in the direction indicated by the arrow and then remove the radiator grille TSB Revision ...

Page 559: ... Up t o 1990 models I 991 models From 1992 models 2 ISA0874 18Ao471 Both side tape 3M ATD Part No 6382 or 3M ATD Part No 6383 or equivalent Removal 1 Rear lid light r L rlear panel garnish 3 Wiper blades and arm 4 Front deck garnish I l 5 Side garnish ir 3 TSB Revision ...

Page 560: ... 6O C 104 176 F 0 Attach the specified both side tape to the side garnish where shown in the figure Specified both side tape 3M A T D P a r t No 6382 or 3M A T D P a r t No 6383 or equivalent Apply a coating of dry adhesive to the adhesive coated part where shown in the figure NOTE Scrape off the old adhesive slightly and apply a coating of new adhesive on the remaining old adhesive 0 Heat the sid...

Page 561: ... Refer to GROUP42 Windshield 3 Front door sash moulding 4 Front belt line moulding Referto GROUP 42 Front Door Moulding and Drip Line Weatherstrip 10 18AO260 5 Rear door sash moulding 6 Rear belt line moulding Refer to GROUP 42 Rear Door Moulding and Drip Line Weatherstrip 7 Quarter window glass moulding Refer to GROUP42 Quarter Window Glass I l 8 Side protect moulding 9 Rear window moulding Refer...

Page 562: ...maining on the side protect moulding 0 Heat the adhesive surface of the both side tape on the side protect moulding to about 40 80 C 104 176 F 0 Attach the specified both side tape of the size shown in the figure to the side protect moulding where shown in the figure Specified both side tape 3M A T D P a r t No 6382 or 3M A T D P a r t No 6383 or equivalent Apply a coating of dry adhesive to the a...

Page 563: ...body 2 INSTALLATION OF FRONT WINDSHIELD MOULDING Prepare a tool such as that shown in the figure and use it to scrape away the old adhesive from the clip installation locations and the corner joint parts then apply a coating of new adhesive and install the moulding NOTE 1 At the clip A location fit together the moulding and the tab of clip A at the clip B location pressing the clip B firmly so tha...

Page 564: ...336 Side air dam removal I l 1 Sideairdam 2 Front side air dam 3 Rear side air dam 4 Center side air dam 18AO873 T u r b o Non Turbo l993 models 18AO875 Air spoiler removal 5 High mounted stop light 6 Connection for high mounted stop light connector and rear lid harness connector 7 Air spoiler TSB Revision ...

Page 565: ... dam to about 40 80 C 104 176 F Attach the specified both side tape to the side air dam where shown in the figure Specified both side tape 3M A T D P a r t No 6382 or 3M A T D P a r t No 6383 or equivalent I Apply a coating of dry adhesive to the adhesive coated part where shown in the figure NOTE Scrape off the old adhesive slightly and apply a coating of new adhesive on he remaining old adhesive...

Page 566: ...the ignition switch at the ACC position select the special test of the tester 3 Check to be sure that the buzzer of the scan tool sounds one time when each of the switches or sensor listed below is activated If the buzzer sounds the input signal is being input to the electronic control unit so that switch or sensor can be considered to be functioning normally if however the buzzer does not sound t...

Page 567: ...wiper relay activation cir vidual part and circuit I er relay cuit I I _ _ I I 1Replace the electronic tronic control I control unit _ _ _ The wipers don t stop when the is disco 1 Repair the wiring har viper switch is switched OFF This problem occurs at the low of the 1 ness or replace the col umn switch ipeed of the wipers ___ I JOTE P 5 l 20 conduct check Short circuit in the wiper No 3 p 51 25...

Page 568: ...P 51 27 of the in dividual part and circuit The wipers intermittent time does not change according to changes in the vehicle speed The intermittent variable volume switch setting is fixed I I i Checking procedure If a malfunction is disco vered as a result of the checking of the input P 51 20 conduct check No 7 P 51 29 of the individual part and circuit MIST WIPERS WASHER INTERLOCKED WIPERS Proble...

Page 569: ...minal 36 which is directly connected to the battery Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector ECU Signal T e r m i n a l terminal No i Status I voltage __ __ 36 Electronic control unit power 1 At all times Battery posi SUPPlY tive voltage Checking the Ground Circuit Disconnect the Connector and Check at the Wiring Harness Side 1 nal No 1 rrn n ...

Page 570: ... Ignition Off Draw Operation Description As the condition for operation of the system HIGH level signals are sent to the electronic control unit when the ignition switch is set to the ACC or ON position Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage Disconnect the ECU Connector and Check at the Wiring Harness Side Status Standard I Ignition switch ACC Ignition switch Checking Individual Part Ignition sw...

Page 571: ... speed of the vehicle Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector ECU Signal Status Terminal terminal No voltage I Wiper switch OFF 5V 10 Wiper switch AUTO signal 1Wiper switch AUTO o v Checking the Wiper Switch AUTO Position Circuit Disconnect the ECU Connector and Check at the Wiring Harness Side ECU terminal No Connected to measured Measuremen...

Page 572: ...U terminal No 1 Connected to measured Measurement Tester component connection Check condition Standard FAST SLOW I I 1 Intermittent variable I Should change in accord i volume switch Resistance l ground I ante with changes of the O Ik0 I 1 intermittent variable I I volume I I Checking Individual Part Intermittent variable volume switch Refer to GROUP 54 Column Switch TSB Revision ...

Page 573: ...rol unit Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector Status W h e n O N 1 sensor signal Vehicle speed 1 sensor I 1 When OFF Checking the Vehicle speed Sensor Circuit Disconnect the Connector of the Electronic Control Unit and Check at the Wiring Harness Side Fir fina No tto measured Measurement i Tester i connection Check condition I Standard I I...

Page 574: ...7 Operation Description With the wiper switch at the AUTO position switch ON the transistor by the intermittent activation signal from the electronic control unit in order to activate the wiper relay Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector I ECU I terminal No Signal 27 Wiper relay signal Checking Individual Part Wiper relay Refer to P 51 32 T...

Page 575: ...us with the activation of the washer motor thus causing the transistor to be switched ON and the wipers to be activated for a certain fixed time Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector ECU terminal No Signal Status Terminal voltage I 35 Washer switch signal j Ignition switch Washer switch OFF ov ACC ___ I Washer switch ON Battery posr tive vo...

Page 576: ...eck garnish 4 Air inlet garnishes 5 Hole cover 6 Linkage mounting bolts 4 7 Wiper motor 8 Linkage 9 Intermittent wiper relay incorporated within the column Refer to GROUP switch Column Switch 10 Wiper and washer switch 11 Washer tank assembly 12 Washer nozzle assembly 13 Washer motor 14 Wiper relay Vehicles with ETACS 16A0530 L TSB Revision ...

Page 577: ...OTOR Check the wiper motor after first disconnecting the wiring harness connector and with the wiper motor remaining installed to the body Operation of Wiper Motor at LOW speed Connect a battery to the wiper motor as shown in the illustration and inspect motor operation at LOW speed Operation of Wiper Motor at HIGH speed Connect a battery to the wiper motor as shown in the illustration and inspect...

Page 578: ...I I lo I I NOTE I O 0 indicates that there is continuity between the terminals 2 The symbol Indicates models equipped with the intermittent wipers 3 The symbol indicates models equipped with the ETACS WIPER RELAY models equipped with ETACS 1 Remove the wiper relay from the cowl top 2 Check for continuity between the terminals when battery voltage is applied between terminals 2 and 5 I During no cu...

Page 579: ...rror 51 33 DOOR MIRROR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION M51auH 19 0293 Removal steps 1 Inner delta cover cap 2 Inner delta cover 3 Harness connector connection 4 Door mirror 5 Mirror NOTE Remote controlled mirror TSB Revision ...

Page 580: ...the table when each terminal is connected to the battery NOTE G O indicates that each terminal is connected to the battery REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR SWI T T INSPECTION REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR SWITCH Operate switches and check for continuity between terminals Left side Right side 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 7 I II 0 0 o o ur DOWN o Q 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 LEFT 0 0 0 0 0 RIGHT o Q 0 0 0 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I NOTE...

Page 581: ...INTERIOR CONTENTS M52AA FLOOR CONSOLE 29 SEAT BELT 39 FRONT SEAT 35 SPECIFICATIONS 2 HEADLINING 2 31 Torque Specifications INSTRUMENT PANEL 22 TRIMS 33 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 REAR SEAT 37 ...

Page 582: ...Front seat inner belt attaching bolt buckle side 35 55 25 40 Automatic seat belt From 1990 models Guide rail mounting bolt A B 8 10 6 7 Guide rail mounting bolt C 35 55 25 40 Guide rail mounting bolt D 16 23 12 16 Outer casing mounting bolt 8 10 6 7 Motor mounting bolt 8 10 6 7 Retractor for lap belt mounting bolt 35 55 25 40 Guide ring mounting bolt 16 23 12 16 Buckle mounting bolt 8x20 mm bolt 1...

Page 583: ...M M52EBAB IGNI TION SWITCH IG1 zl I SUB FUSIBLE LINK Q I 5 7 L 1OA _ _ __ ______________________ c 39 COMBINATION METER c 50 5 s 0 c 2 I r 11 SEAT BELT SWITCH 1 C 36 fl J B 3 T MINDER C 65 16 E 14 B c 74x Izl 34 D 33 m d FRONT DOOR SWITCH LEFT SIDE X96 AC HOQOO N n 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 584: ...the key reminder switch the buzzer the seat belt switch the seat belt warning timer and ground and the buzzer sounds for approx 6 seconds l When the driver buckles the seat belt the seat belt switch is switched OFF and the buzzer stops TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Key reminder warning The key reminder warning doesn t sound 1 The seat belt warning function is OK l Check the door switch 2 The seat belt war...

Page 585: ...ATIC SEAT BELT MWBGE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1990 models AGW8i UTOMATIC EAT BELT ONTROL UNIT D 46 1 I PLYI GN J GNO V V 2 7 17 s n m 3N IGl 2 BW I SUB FUSIB LINK 0 W g E EEN KEY FEN KEY REMOVED INSTALLED m AJ 1 6 KX35 AC H1532 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 586: ... F nJI 2 5 z4 W v 1 2 2 I D 24 l D 32 1 4 2 g AUTOMATIC SEAT K LEFT s 1 DE OF ON 16 3 A AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RELAY RIGHT SIDE 1 B 2 2 D 21 3 AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RIGHT SIDE ___ I 23 m 14 m m cl AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT D 13 1 CONTROL UNIT D 46 l 1 1 m I m ml TSB Revision ...

Page 587: ...SEAT BELT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM From 1991 models IGNI c C TION CH JGI SUB FUSIBLE LINK a z IOD OR Lb 2 w I 8 c 50 FEN KEY KFN KEY REMOVED JNBTALLED kl GND GND V V I 3 7 L 17 c 5 3 I 14 is 3 n iK LFELT SWITCH l EJ D 43 I fTimq D 46 2 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 588: ... 4 1N ON AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RELAY RIGHT SIDE r 3 cl E jE i J I I 3 6 I AUTOMATIC c j igF BELT RELAY LEFT SIDE EG W MOT R a RIGHT SIDE M Ji1 I 31 M 1 1 j t _ c 7 5 z CL i ___ _ J _ 5 1 f m 1 8 l 9 j5 4 i z I z I cu I L 2 pq 2 AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT D 13 1 CONTROL UNIT D 46 l AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT D 46 l m m m d m A Is3 cf 63 cu Remark mark indicates vehicles with THEFT ALARM SYSTEM 1...

Page 589: ...k fuse I Refer to inspection section P 52 45 Replace the control unit Replace or reconnect the fuse Replace the buzzer Open harness wire or disconnected connector Check using check chart No 2 Defective control unit Replace the control unit he slide anchor Defective driving device Try to move the slide If the slide anchor does oes not move from or problem in electrical anchor in both directions not...

Page 590: ... Draw A1228 step Check method Operation Check object Judgement Cause Normal Malfunction 1 Unplug the Harness side Battery positive 0 V Open harness wire connector from terminal voltage voltage or disconnected the control unit of control unit connector between connector junction block and 11 Ground control unit 2 lgnrtlon switch Harness side Battery positive 0 V Open harness wire ON terminal voltag...

Page 591: ...uzzer Circuit Up to 1990 models IGNITION SWITCH IGl SUB FUSIBLE LINK 6 RB 16 3 KEY REMINDER 1 SWITCH 1 I When kev is A0 6 T When ke is emoved BUZZER 13 t installed WARNING LIGHT COMBINATION METER c 25 I a z 12 120 P AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT 19 0444 TSB Revision ...

Page 592: ...l r SUB FUSIBLE LINK I IOD OR STORAGE CONNECTOR f 3 2 7 JUNCTION BLOCK 2 I RB 16 P RE R pgq KEY SWITCH 1 Ji c When key is removed 6 i I I I I I I I I L 25 1 tf 2 2 IOD Ignition Off Draw SEAT BELT WARNING BUZZER 1 67 2 O AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 593: ...er switch of control unit Battery positive or disconnected or plug in the connector harness side voltage connector between connector correctly Unplug the connector key reminder connector from the f 13 Ground switch and control control unit 12 Ground unit Remove the key from the ignition 12 Ground A voltage same as Defective key Check the key switch o v or lower than reminder switch reminder switch...

Page 594: ...nnector between connector correcti harness side release switch connector and ground 1 Ground Improper ground Correctly connect connection to ground 2 Plug in the Terminal to ground 0 R when slide Remains Defective release switch continuity of Replace the driving anchor is not in OQormQ release switch device assembly connector control unit the release Refer to P 52 42 Unplug the harness side switch...

Page 595: ... connector L H 2 Ground R H 4 Ground 0l l Open harness wire between outer switch and ground Improper ground connection Correctly connect to ground 2 Pull out and retract the shoulder belt Terminal to ground continuity of outer switch side connector L H l 2 R L 13 4 OD Q from the belt s fully retracted position until belt is pulled out approx midway outer switch OFF 0 Q from the approx midway pulle...

Page 596: ...OMATIC SEAT BELT CONTROL UNIT Vehicles without Theft Alarm Vehicles with Theft Alarm jm DOOR LATCt SWITCH LEFT SIDE m I L m J 14 14 a m m r m FASTEN gziH SIDE I Theft Alarm Vehicles without N fL I I Vehicles with Theft Alarm DOOR LATCH SWITCH RIGHT SIDE 0 m A Vehicles with Theft Alarm 1991 models TSB Revision ...

Page 597: ...harness wire Replace the latch switch continuity of open OgorcoQ or disconnected harness or plug in connector control unit 03 Q when door is connector between the connector Unplug the harries side closed control unit and correctly connector from the con L or door latch switch control untt 6 G nd Open and close the door 4 Unplug the Terminal to ground CO Q when door is Remains Open harness wire Rep...

Page 598: ...ctive release Replace the driving release switch continuity of open and slide OQorooQ switch device assembly connector control unit anchor is not in the Refer to P 5242 Unplug the harness side connector from the connector release range release switch control unit 16 Ground ON Open harness wire Repair the harness Open and close the 03 Cl when door is or disconnected or plug in the door closed and s...

Page 599: ...harness side connector from connector control unit L H f8 Ground g Ground R H 18 Ground 1 g Ground T Judgement I Cause Remedy Normal oI2 Battery positive voltage Batten positive voltage Malfunction WQ Open harness wire Repair the harness between motor relay and ground o v Improper ground Correctly connect connection to ground Open harness wire Repair the harness or disconnected or plug in the conn...

Page 600: ...atic seat belt control unit 1 C 1 Fasten switch 1 A I Automatic seat belt motor I E 1 Key reminder switch I Automatic seat belt motor relay 1 D 1 Outer switch I F Buckle switch Buzzer G Seat belt warning light J K Release switch H I Door latch switch BI I 1 Fasten switch Door latch I switch 19A0435 lBAO500 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 601: ...INTERIOR Troubleshooting 52 21 69AO165 WA1096 19A0439 I 16 0578 1 I TSB Revision ...

Page 602: ...ENT PANEL M52UAAS For installation of the instrument panel the bolts and screws described below are used They are indicated by symbols in the illustration Washer assembled applng screw D Thread diameter L Effective thread length TSB Revision ...

Page 603: ...d for the installation of instrument panel should be removed and installed by the following procedures described below REMOVAL I Use a cross tip screwdriver to push inward the pin at the centre of the trim clip to a depth of about 2 mm 08 in 2 Pull the trim clip outward to remove it Caution Do not push the pin inward more than necessary because it may damage the grommet or the pin may fall in if p...

Page 604: ... Tilt bracket installation bolts ISA0255 Pre removal and Post installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Console Box Refer to P 52 29 l Dsconnect and Connect the Con nection of the Body Wiring Harness and the Instrument Panel Wiring I Harness Disconnect and Connect the Con I nection of the Instrument Panel Wiring Harness and the Junction Block 8 Under cover 9 Stopper NOTE 10 Glove box as...

Page 605: ...meter wiring harness connector connections 19 Speaker garnishes 20 Clock 21 Heater control assembly installation screws 22 Instrument panel mounting bolts 23 Coupling of the instrument panel wiring harness and the body wiring harness and of the instrument panel wiring harness and the junction block 24 Coupling of the MFI control relay and the control wiring harness 25 Instrument panel assembly TSR...

Page 606: ... combination meter by turning the upper part of the combination meter toward you 2 For models with the automatic position indicator remove the combination meter after first removing the harness connector 17 REMOVAL OF SPEEDOMETER CABLE ADAPTER 1 Disconnect the speedometer cable at the transaxle end of the cable 2 Pull the speedometer cable slightly toward the vehicle interior release the lock by t...

Page 607: ...181 Parcel box 9 Glove box Lap shower grille 10 Defogger switch Instrument under cover 11 Rheostat Outlet bezel 12 Instrument panel mat or ACTIVE Knee protector Electronic Control Suspension indicator Knee protector bracket 13 Speakers Glove box lock 14 Glove box frame Glove box cover 15 MFI control relay TSB Revision I ...

Page 608: ...e box reinfrocement assembly 23 Striker 24 Passenger side reinforcement 25 Center duct 26 Air duct R H 27 Air duct L H 28 Side air outlet assembly 29 Center air outlet assembly 30 Center reinforcement 31 Driver side reinforcement 32 Buzzer 33 Instrument panel wiring harness 34 Instrument panel eB 23 WA0244 From 1990 models Q 2 3 T 7333122 B lOAo44 TSB Revision ...

Page 609: ...io panel Vehicles without audio 5 Parking brake side panel 14 Box Vehicles without audio 6 Switch panel or box 15 Radio plug vehicles without audio 7 Radio panel Vehicles with audio 8 Audio Refer to GROUP 54 Radio and tape player 9 rL p g of the audio and body wiring 10 Guide ring From 1990 models SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 11 INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY Insert the tabs of the console...

Page 610: ...le 2 Shift lever boot 3 Cup tray 4 Inner box 5 Lid assembly 6 Stoooer Type l Type 2 9 i5 5 7 n B j v shift lever panel 19AO424 7 Rer te controlled mirror switch 8 Power PWRVECONO ECO changeover switch or plug 9 Electronic power steering switch or plug 10 Box plate 11 Bracket 12 Bracket vehicles without audio TSB Revision ...

Page 611: ...Trim Refer to P 52 33 Vehicles with sunroof Removal steps I Sunvisors 2 Inside rear view mirror 3 Dome light 4 Map light 5 Sunroof switch and dome light assembly 6 Center pillar upper trims I 989 models Refer to P 5233 7 Rear pillar trims Refer to P 52 33 C 8 Roof rail trims 9 Front pillar trims Refer to P 52 33 10 Assist grip 4 11 Front headlining trim c 12 Rear headlinina trim 13 Sunroof headli ...

Page 612: ...19AO454 19AO455 R H 11 REMOVAL OF FRONT HEADLINING TRIM 12 REAR HEADLINING TRIM Manually turn lip part at the clip positions in the direction shown in the illustration remove the front or rear headlin ing trim SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 8 INSTALLATION OF ROOF RAIL TRIMS Install the clips to body and then install the roof rail trim I Trim lSAO171 TSB Revision ...

Page 613: ... 3 Rear scuff plate 4 Center pillar lower trim 5 Sash guide 6 Center pillar upper trim 1989 models 7 Rear seat belt anchor plate 8 Rear pillar trim 25 40 fths Roof rail trim Refer to P 52 31 9 Center pillar upper trim From 1990 models i i 10 Front pillar trim Driving device assembly Refer to P 52 42 NOTE 1 1 Belt rail trim The symbol indicates the trim clip Refer to P 52 23 lSAO453 ...

Page 614: ...er to GROUP 54 Lighting System l Removal and Installation of Rear Speaker Garnish Refer to GROUP 54 Audio System lQAO199 II Rear shelf trim 12 Rear end trim cover 13 Trunk rear trim 14 Trunk side trim R H 15 Trunk side trim L H 16 Trunk front trim 17 Jack cover 19AO247 NOTE The l symbol indicates the trim clip Refer to P 52 23 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 615: ... Guide E er to P 52 42 35 55 Nm 25 40 ft lbs 24 36 Nm 17 26 ft lbs 24 36 Nm 17 26 ft lbs 19A0249 35 55 Nm pe 2 25 40 ft lbs r 7 A 17 26 ft lbs M52UEALa Removal steps l 4 1 Seat anchor covers 2 Seat under tray l 3 Seat mounting bolts rear l a 4 Seat mounting nuts front 5 Connection for seat belt switch wiring harness 6 Front seat assembly 7 Headrestraints 24 36 Nm 5 17 26 ftlbs 19AO217 TSB Revision...

Page 616: ...ed torque 1 INSTALLATION OF SEAT ANCHOR COVERS 1 Securely install the front side seat anchor forward tab to the front seat forward installation bracket 2 Turn the seat anchor cover in the direction indicated by the arrow and install the tab at the side part to the hole in the bracket side part 3 Securely install the rear side seat anchor cover outer side rearward tab to the front seat rearward ins...

Page 617: ... 37 REAR SEAT MSZUFAti REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION I 2 17 26 Nm I 12 19 ftlbs Type 2 19A0114 17 26 Nm Ii 19 ft lbs 3 4 ftlbs WA0408 2 Seatback attachmg bolt l 3 Seatback 4 Trunk through plate 5 Rear seatback tray TSB Revision ...

Page 618: ...art of the seat cushion down ward pull the lever to release the lock Attachment wire SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK Push the seatback in the direction indicated in the illustra tion then securely attach the attachment wire to the body side hook and install the seatback 1 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION While pushing the seat cushion toward the rear securely attach to the in...

Page 619: ...uff plate 2 Rear scuff plate 3 Center pillar lower trim 4 Sash guide attaching bolt 1 4 8 Retractor bracket and anchor bracket attaching bolt 9 Seat belt tongue side 5 Center pillar upper trim Refer to P 52 33 10 Free hinge cover 11 Inner seat belt attaching bolt buckle side l 4 6 Belt guide l 12 Inner seat belt buckle side l 4 7 Retractor bracket attachrng screw 19A0242 INSPECTION SEAT BELT TIMER...

Page 620: ...onds 3 Make sure that even when terminal 3 is disconnect while test bulbs 1 and 2 are lighted in 2 above test bulb 1 remains lighted BUZZER 1 Remove the buzzer from the instrument panel 2 Remove the buzzer and check if it sounds when a battery voltage is applied across the buzzer terminals SEAT BELT SWITCH 1 Disconnect the seat belt switch connector 2 Check the continuity between the terminals Ter...

Page 621: ...lt switch harness to the seat by using the band Caution The marked part of the seat belt switch harness should be connected by the band Projection 8 INSTALLATION OF RETRACTOR BRACKET AND ANCHOR BRACKET ATTACHING BOLT 7 RETRACTOR BRACKET ATTACHING SCREW 1 Pass the anchor plate through the hole of the center pillar lower trim 2 Securely fit the projection of the retractor s stopper into the hole at ...

Page 622: ...5 Guide rail mounting bolt B 6 Guide rail mounting bolt C 7 Guide rail mounting bolt D 8 Driving device assembly Lap belt removal steps Front scuff plate Refer to P 52 33 Rear scuff plate Refer to P 52 33 Center pillar lower trim Refer to P 52 33 9 Belt holder IO Bezzel 11 Retractor for lap belt I 19AO420 35 55 Nm 16 23 Nm 25 40 ftlbs 12 16 ftlbs Buckle removal steps 9 Belt holder 12 Guide ring 13...

Page 623: ...t control unit 23 Retractor mounting bracket 12 Guide ring 19 Console box assembly Refer to P 52 29 22 Automatic seat belt control unit Buzzer removal steps Heater control panel Refer to P 52 25 24 Buzzer INSPECTION AUTOMATIC SEAT BELT MOTOR RELAY 1 Remove the automatic seat belt motor relay 2 Check for continuity between terminals under the conditions described below TSB Revision NOTE I O O indic...

Page 624: ...switch automatic seat Automatic belt motor seat belt relay harness connector Fasten switct Automatic seat belt connector Release position Fasten position 1 3 1 2 4 6 0 __ 0 0 Fasten position Release position _ 0 0 0 Caution The slide anchor must be activated all the way to the fasten position or the release position without stopping part way on the guide rail NOTE 1 O O indicates terminals to whic...

Page 625: ...al BUZZER Check that buzzer sounds when battery voltage is applied to the buzzer terminal Rear seat belt 35 55 Nm 25 40 ft lbs 6 Removal steps 1 Rear seat cushion Refer to P 52 37 2 Rear seatback Refer to P 52 37 3 Rear pillar trims Refer to P 52 33 4 Seat belt mounting bolts l 5 Seat belt anchor plate attaching bolts 6 Rear seat belt center 7 Seat belt buckle side 8 Sash guide attaching bolt I940...

Page 626: ... body hole and install the retractor to the body 5 INSTALLATlON OF SEAT BELT ANCHOR PLATE ATTACHING BOLTS Install so that the anchor plate is within the range of the angle indicated in the illustration CHILD RESTRAINT FITTING Install the anchorage for the child restraint system by removing the plug from the rear shelf trim and installing the child restraint fitting to the rear deck as shown in the...

Page 627: ...USTMENT PROCEDURES 13 Charging 17 Compressor Drive Belt Adjustment 17 Compressor Noise 23 Discharging the System 20 Handling Tubing and Fittings 22 Idle up Operation Check 24 Performance Test 21 Power Relay Check 24 Refrigerant Leak Repair Procedure 21 Test Procedures 13 SPECIAL TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 General Specifications 2 Lubricants 3 Sealant and adhesives 3 Service Specifications 2 Torque Sp...

Page 628: ... thermostat OFF 3 2 37 8 ON 4 2 39 6 C F Burn out temperature 105 221 g oz R 12 Approx 936 33 0 SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS M55CB items Specifications Standard value Air therm0 sensor and air inlet sensor standard resistance value kQ Air therm0 sensor 0 C 32 F 10 C 50 F 20 C 68 F 30 C 86 F 40 C 104 F Air inlet sensor 0 C 32 F 3 31 10 C 50 F 2 00 20 C 68 F 1 25 30 C 86 F 0 81 40 C 104 F 0 53 Air conditi...

Page 629: ...h for condenser fan motor Nm 15 17 17 13 45 55 23 27 24 28 23 27 30 40 IO 14 ft lbs 11 12 8 9 4 33 39 17 19 18 20 17 19 22 28 8 10 LUBRICANTS M 55CD Items Each connection of refrigerant line Shaft seal of the compressor Shaft seal plate of the compressor Specified lubricants FREOL S 83 or SUNISO 5GS Quantity As required SEALANT AND ADHESIVES Items Enqine coolant temperature switch threaded part Sp...

Page 630: ...function Obstructed heater hoses Improperly adjusted control cables Plugged or partially plugged heater core Incorrect adjustment of mode selection dampers Incorrect installation of mode selection control wire Ducts are incorrectly incompletely connected crushed bent or clogged Poor grounding Burnt out fuse Malfunction blower switch Malfunction resister Malfunction blower motor Malfunction heater ...

Page 631: ...ltage when the air conditioning switch is pressed in two steps Air conditioning switch OFF 1 Yes Is there continuity between ter minals 2 and 4 of the air condi tioning compressor clutch relay Is there continuity between ter minals 1 and 3 when battery positive voltage is applied be tween terminals 2 and 4 4 Yes Is the high pressure side refrigerant pressure within the range of 210 2 700 kPa 29 9 ...

Page 632: ...conditioning switch OFF and when the ambient temperature of the air therm0 sensor IS 25 C 77 F is the measured resistance approx 3 1 kilohms or higher 1 Yes When the resistance of the air inlet sensor is measured when the ambient temperature of the air inlet sensor is 25 C 77 F is the measured resistance approx 1 kilohms or higher No Malfunction of the air therm0 sensor Refer to P 55 7 No Malfunct...

Page 633: ...of terminal 5 23 and 26 of the auto compressor control unit be come voltage divided values by the resistance value of each sensor and by the resistance within the auto compressor control unit 2 The compressor operation mode changes from OFF to ECONO to A C each time the air con ditioning switch is pressed When the air conditioning switch is pressed in to the first step the mode is changed to the E...

Page 634: ... OFF Sensor temperature 25 C 58 F Approx 0 15V 6 Air conditioning compressor clutch When all conditions for swrtch ON of the Battery positive relay compressor are satisfied voltage 12 Refrigerant temperature sensor At all times 5v Air Conditioning Switch Terminal Voltage 1 Terminal No 1 Sianal Conditions Terminal voltage I 1 Air conditioning switch power supply Ignition switch ON blower switch ON ...

Page 635: ...ESSES AND COMPONENTS LAYOUT DIAGRAM Engine 1 Refrigerant temperature sensor Z I Auto compressor control unit 4 Air conditioning switch 5 Air therm0 sensor 6 Air inlet sensor 7 Control wiring harness and body wiring harness coupling Dash panel 5 6 36A0079 TSB Revision ...

Page 636: ...Condenser fan motor relay LO HI NOTE Symbol Name Symbol A Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch for compressor magnetic clutch D H Engine coolant temperature switch for condenser fan motor D E Radiator fan motor relay LO HI A G Refrigerant temperature sensor B F Heater relay I C The Name column is arranged in alphabetical order compressor __ _ 2OAO328 TSB Revision Engine coolant _ I ...

Page 637: ...HEATER AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION Troubleshooting 55 I 1 Air therm0 sensor Evaporator TSB Revision I ...

Page 638: ... sterile mineral oil handy when working on the refrigeration system Should any liquid refrigerant get into the eyes use a few drops of mineral oil to wash them out R 12 is rapidly absorbed by the oil Next splash the eyes with plenty of cold water Call your doctor immediately even though irritation has ceased after treatment Caution Do not heat R 12 above 40 C 104 F In most instances moderate heat ...

Page 639: ...valve handle to open the service valves for checking the pressure 4 If a pressure of approx 490 kPa 71 psi is indicated on the suction gauge side and a pressure of approx 883 kPa 128 psi is indicated on the discharge gauge side the compress or has abnormal compression Replace the compressor SIGHT GLASS REFRIGERANT LEVEL TEST The sight glass is a refrigerant level indicator To check the refrigerant...

Page 640: ...a difference in the temperatures the receiver drier is restricted Replace the receiver drier I 20A0297 TSB Revision 2 If the sight glass is clear the magnetic clutch is engaged and there is no significant temperature difference be tween compressor inlet and discharge lines the system has lost some refrigerant 3 If the sight glass is clear and the magnetic clutch is disengaged the clutch is faulty ...

Page 641: ...ssure switch ON condition shown to the left the switch is functioning normally If not replace the switch PRESSURE SWITCH The pressure switch installed above the high pressure pipe is for control of the condenser and the radiator fan it regulates the fan in two steps LO and HI If there is a problem such as non operation of the condenser fan check by following the procedures described below 1 Instal...

Page 642: ... the sensor is normal there is a malfunction of the auto compressor control unit and it should be replaced AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH for compressor magnetic clutch DOHC The air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch is con nected in series with the compressor magnetic clutch power relay It disengages the compressor when the temperature of radia tor coolant rises ab...

Page 643: ...lar service intervals and adjust as needed Standard value When new belt installed 5 5 5 mm 20 22 in When used belt installed 6 7 mm 23 27 in CHARGING CHARGING THE SYSTEM 1 Keeping the handle completely returned to the original position The valve is closed mount adapter valves and on the service valves of the high and low pressures NOTE Install the high pressure service valve to the discharge port ...

Page 644: ... is held 12 Keeping the handle completely returned to the original position The valve is opened mount the charge valve on the service can 13 Keeping the handle of the adapter valve completely returned to the original position The valve is closed remove the vacuum gauge and mount the service can 14 Screw in the handle of the charge valve The valve is closed to make a hole in the service can 15 Retu...

Page 645: ...install the adapter valve ij to the charge valve 3 Connect the charging hose to the adapter valve 0 4 Keeping the handle completely returned to the original position The valve is closed connect the adapter valve to the charging hose 5 Screw in the handle of the charge valve The valve is closed to make a hole In the service can 6 Completely return the handle of the charging valve to the ongrnal pos...

Page 646: ...CONDITIONING SYSTEM Too little oil will provide inadequate compressor lubrication and cause a compressor failure Too much oil will increase dis charge air temperature When a FX105V compressor is installed at the factory it contains 150 cm3 9 2 cu in of refrigerant oil While the air conditioning system is in operation the oil is carried through the entire system by the refrigerant Some of this oil ...

Page 647: ...e discharge air temperature NOTE If the clutch cycles take the reading before the clutch disengages PERFORMANCE TEMPERATURE CHART Garage ambient tem 21 70 26 7 80 32 2 90 37 8 100 43 3 110 perature C F Discharge air tern 2 8 4 4 3 3 5 0 3 9 5 6 4 4 7 2 4 4 7 8 perature C F 37 40 38 41 39 42 40 45 40 46 Compressor discharge 758 1 310 896 1 517 1 103 1 793 1 310 1 999 1 517 2 206 pressure kPa psi 11...

Page 648: ...isture can enter the system when it is opened for repair or replacement of lines or components The following precautions must be observed The system must be completely discharged before opening any fitting of connection in the refrigeration system Open fittings with caution even after the system has been discharged If any pressure is noticed as a fitting is loosened allow trapped pressure to bleed...

Page 649: ... any other special conditions Noises that develop during air conditioning operation can often be misleading For example what sounds like a failed front bearing or connecting rod may be caused by loose bolts nuts mounting brackets or a loose clutch assembly Verify acces sory drive belt tension power steering or generator Improper accessory drive belt tension can cause a misleading noise when the co...

Page 650: ...176 194 F l Lights electric cooling fan and accessories Set to OFF l Transaxle Neutral N or P for vehicles with A T l Steering wheel Straightforward 2 Ch whether or not the idling speed is the standard Standard value 750 rpm NOTE There is no necessity to make an adjustment because the idling speed is automatically adjusted by the IAC system If however there occurs a deviation from the standard val...

Page 651: ...selection control wire I 3 Connection for the temperature control wire 4 Ashtray 5 Knobs I 6 Heater control panel 7 Foot shower nozzle 8 Foot shower duct l 9 Connection for the mode selection control wire IO Radio panel 11 Radio and tape player l a 12 Connection for the left right air volume control wire 13 Heater control assembly 14 Control lever assembly TSB Revision I ...

Page 652: ...s Remove the installation screws and pull the heater con trol panel toward you then disconnect the connection of each connector and light OFF l Medrum first NOTE O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION MWGDAM 12 CONNECTION OF LEFT RIGHT AIR VOLUME CON TROL WIRE 1 Move the left right air volume control lever in the heater control assembly to the L p...

Page 653: ...of the temperature control wire to the end of the blend air damper lever and then secure the outer cable by using a clip 2 INSTALLATION OF AIR SELECTION CONTROL WIRE Connect the air selection control wire to the air selection damper lever by following the steps below 1 Set the inner outer air changeover knob or lever to the inner air circulation position 2 Turn the inner outer air changeover dampe...

Page 654: ... downward and forward 2 Disconnect the connector for the resistor 3 Using a circuit tester measure the resistance between the terminals indicated below The condition can be considered satisfactory if the value measured at this time is equivalent to the standard value Standard value Terminals measured Between terminals 0 0 Between terminals I Between terminals 0 0 Standard value Q Approx 1 7 1 96 A...

Page 655: ... conditioning switch 5 Air conditioning switch 2OAO189 INSPECTION M55QcA6 AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH CHECK 1 Remove the heater control panel 2 Remove the connector for the air conditioning switch and then check for continuity as described below Terminal 2 4 5 3 5 OFF If pressed 1 step ECONOMY 0 1 LJl If pressed 2 steps A C NOTE I The C 0 symbol indicates continuity 2 Indication light 1 TSB Revision I...

Page 656: ... Floor Console and Instrument Panel Refer to GROUP 52 Front Seat Floor Console and Instrument Panel 1 0 2OAO259 7 l 10 Duct Vehicles without air conditioning 1 I Evaporator installation bolts nuts and clips Vehicles with air conditioning 12 Heater unit Removal steps 1 Instrument panel center stay 2 Foot shower nozzle 3 Lap shower duct 4 Foot shower duct RH 5 Foot shower duct LH 6 Center duct 7 Rea...

Page 657: ...sembly set the inside outside air selection damper to the position that permits outside air introduction 20A0417 OA0413 I 2 With the evaporator pulled outward to the cabin side remove the heater unit INSPECTION M55lCAG l Check the operation of dampers and link mechanism l HEATER CORE REPLACEMENT 2 Remove the plate MHIDAH 3 Pull out the heater core from the heater unit 4 Insert the heater core into...

Page 658: ...e 9 Evaporator installation bolts nuts and clips vehicles with air conditioning or duct mounting clips vehicles without air conditioning 1991 models 1990 models 2OAO 505 10 Hose 4 11 Blower assembly I 12 Blower motor assembly 13 Packing 14 Fan installation nut 15 Fan l 16 Blower motor and fan assembly 17 Blower case SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL M55KBAL 11 REMOVAL OF BLOWER ASSEMBLY With the evaporato...

Page 659: ...ly to the bat tery and check that the blower motor operates smoothly 3 Next reverse the polarity and check that the blower motor operates smoothly in the reverse direction 1 Battery 1 1 B a t t e n 1 16LO260 2OAO503 SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION M55KDAH 13 INSTALLATION OF PACKING If the packing is cracked replace with a new one 12 INSTALLATION OF BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY Before installing the blower...

Page 660: ...7 Glove box 8 Glove box frame 9 Connector for MFI control relay and connector for glove box switch 10 Ashtray and knobs 11 Heater control panel 12 Air conditioning switch connector 13 Body wiring harness and air conditioning wrnng harness connectron 14 Evaporator 15 Air conditioning wiring harness 16 Drain hose 20A0329 Charging of Refrigerant Refer to P 55 17 l Checking for Refrigerant Gas Leakage...

Page 661: ...anel at the notched part of the evaporator after the plate has been removed and then remove the evaporator Caution Do this work carefully so as not to damage the insulator INSPECTION M55RcAA l Check for damage of the evaporator fin part l Check for damage or collapse of the drain hose l Check for peeling or cracking of the insulator AIR THERMOSTAT SENSOR AND AIR INLET SENSOR CHECK For information ...

Page 662: ...S 83 or SUNISO 5GS 20A0325 Disassembly steps 1 Wiring harness 2 Auto compressor control unit 4 3 Clips 4 Plate 5 Evaporater case upper 6 Air inlet sensor 7 Air therm0 sensor 8 Evaporater case lower 9 Evaporater assembly IO Grommet 11 Insulator 12 Rubber insulator 13 Clip 4 14 Expansion valve 15 0 ring TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 663: ...AO324 SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY 3 REMOVAL OF CLIPS MWFAE Remove the clips with a flat blade screwdriver covered with a shop towel to prevent damage to case surfaces 14 REMOVAL OF EXPANSION VALVE Loosen the flare nut by using two wrenches for both the inlet and outlet TSB Revision I ...

Page 664: ...mance Test Refer to P 5521 Removal steps of compressor drive belt and tension pulley 1 Generator drive belt 4 2 Tension pulley assembly installation bolt l 3 Tension pulley assembly l 4 Compressor drive belt 5 Nut Forion pulley 8 Adjust plate 9 Tension pulley bracket 2oAoo38 2 3 2 7 Nm 17 19 ft lbs 2 2 4 5 5 5 Nm 2OPO244 Removal steps of compressor 23 27 Nm 17 19 lklbs 1 Generator drive belt 4 2 T...

Page 665: ... the tension of the compressor drive belt to zero 2 Remove the tension pulley assembly installation bolts and then remove the tension pulley assembly together with the compressor drive belt 11 REMOVAL OF SUCTION HOSE CONNECTION Plug the disconnected hose and the compressor opening to prevent dust dirt and other foreign material from entering 14 REMOVAL OF COMPRESSOR This work must be done carefull...

Page 666: ...R S MAG NETIC CLUTCH 1 Disconnect the compressor s connector 2 Check to be sure that there is continuity between body ground and terminal at the compressor side OPERATION CHECK OF THE COMPRESSOR S s MAGNETIC CLUTCH 1 Disconnect the compressor s connector 2 Connect terminal at the compressor side to the positive terminal of the battery and ground the negative terminal of the battery to the com pres...

Page 667: ...0 cm3 9 1 cu in X cm3 Y cm3 NOTE Y cm3 indicates the amount of oil in the refrigerant line the condenser the cooling unit etc 4ir conditionina comwessor 1 I 4 INSTALLATION OF COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT S TENSION PULLEY ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION BOLT 1 Attach the compressor drive belt to the tension pulley assembly as shown in the figure 2 Attach the compressor drive belt to the crankshaft pulley and the co...

Page 668: ...embly steps a 13 Shaft seal l 14 Seal plate 12 O ring 11 Front housing l 16 Felt l 15 Bearing IO Bolts 11 Front housing 12 O ring WI 13 Shaft seal 14 Seal plate I l 15 Bearing l 16 Felt Refrigerant temperature sensor disassembly steps 20 Refrigerant temperatue sensor 21 O ring Control valve disassembly 22 Control valve High pressure relief valve disassembly steps 17 Dust cover 18 High pressure rel...

Page 669: ... the M6 bolts in the armature plate so that the ends of the M6 bolts do not contact the front housing 2 Use box end wrenches to hold the provisionally install ed bolts so as to prevent the armature plate from turning and then remove the nut 3 Remove the armature plate from the crankshaft 14 REMOVAL OF SEAL PLATE Use a flat tip screwdriver or snap ring pliers to remove the seal plate from the front...

Page 670: ...er the high pressure relief valve closes thus allowing continued operation 1 If a leak is detected at section A replace the high pressure relief valve The valve can be used unless there is a leak from that section 2 If a leak is detected at section B retighten the valve If the leak still persists after retightening the valve replace the packing REFRIGERANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK The refrigerant ...

Page 671: ...e temporarily ceases to drop Then the pressure again starts dropping as the engine speed further increases If the valve is abnormal the low prssure drops in direct proportion to the increase in engine speed without a temporary leveling off at the 180 kPa 25 psi pressure level SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY 13 INSTALLATION OF SHAFT SEAL Caution M55SHAB Do not touch the sealing surfaces of shaft seal ...

Page 672: ... Using the special tool and a press force the bearing into the front housing Caution 1 Avoid applying force suddenly to the compressor body 2 Set up the compressor in the press so that no force is applied to the sensor or valves 8 INSTALLATION OF CLUTCH COIL 1 Align the pin of the clutch coil with the pin hole in the front housing and then fit it into the hole 2 Install the snap ring so that the t...

Page 673: ...mature plate NOTE Provisionally install the M6 bolts in the armature plate so that the ends of the M6 bolts do not contact the front housing 2 Use box end wrenches to hold the provisionally install ed bolts so as to prevent the armature plate from turning and then tighten the nut 3 Check whether or not the air gap of the clutch is within the standard value Standard value 0 4 0 6 mm 015 023 in NOTE...

Page 674: ...on of Refer to P 55 21 8 Condenser fan removal steps 1 Branch tube 2 Condenser fan motor 3 Motor and resistor assembly 4 Fan 5 Shroud Removal of condenser 1 Branch tube 2 Condenser fan motor 6 Liquid pipe and liquid hose connection Refer to P 55 22 7 O rings 8 Insulator mstallatlon bolts 9 Power relay assembly 10 Front end cover 11 Condenser 12 Bushings TSB Revision I ...

Page 675: ...VAL OF CONDENSER Move the radiator toward the engine and then remove the condenser upward INSPECTION M55TCAG l Check the condenser fin for crushing or other damage l Check the condenser s high pressure hose and pipe in stallation parts for damage or deformation l Check the condenser fan shroud for damage CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CHECK 1 Disconnect the connection of the connector for the condenser fan m...

Page 676: ...RESISTOR CHECK 1 Disconnect the connection of the connector for the resistor and then measure the resistance between terminals 2 The condition can be considered satisfactory if the measured resistance is within the range noted below Standard value 0 6n 210 TSB Revision ...

Page 677: ...gerant Refer to Charging of Refrigerant Refer to P 55 20 1 P 55 17 Checking for Gas Leakage Performance Test Refer to P 55 21 2OAO209 4 4 Removal of condenser 1 Branch tube Non Turbo 2 Air duct Turbo 3 Air hose Turbo 4 Air pipe Turbo 5 Liquid pipe and liquid hose connection Refer to P 55 22 1 6 O rings 7 Insulator installation bolts 8 Power relay assembly 9 Front end cover 10 Condenser 11 Bushings...

Page 678: ...allation bolt 15 Condenser fan motor 16 Condenser fan motor and resistor assembly 17 Fan 18 Shroud 2OAO527 SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL M55TBAC 5 REMOVAL OF LIQUID PIPE AND LIQUID HOSE CON NECTION Plug the disconnected hose and pipes and the openings of the condenser in order to prevent dust dirt and other foreign materials from entering 10 REMOVAL OF CONDENSER Move the radiator toward the engine and...

Page 679: ...ER FAN MOTOR CHECK 7 Disconnect the connection of the connector for the condenser fan motor 2 Check to be sure that the condenser fan motor operates when battery voltage is applied to terminal and terminal is grounded RESISTOR CHECK 1 Disconnect the connection of the connector for the resistor and then measure the resistance between terminals 2 The condition can be considered satisfactory if the m...

Page 680: ...2OAO291 NOTE I For information concerning O rings indicated by the symbol refer to P 55 23 2 Plug the disconnected hose pipe etc to prevent dust dirt foreign material etc from entering the openings 3 A B S Anti lock braking system INSPECTION MHUCAB l CHECKING DUAL SWITCH AND THE PRESSURE SWITCH For information concerning the checking procedures of the dual switch and the pressure switch refer to S...

Page 681: ...2 Trim Removal steps v 1 Instrument panel under cover I 989 models Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Panel 1 l Knee protector From 1990 models Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Panel 13 M55YA 2 Foot shower nozzle 3 Foot shower duct rtght side 4 Lap shower duct 5 Under cover 6 Foot shower duct left side 7 Duct Vehicles without air conditioning 8 Instrument panel 9 Center duct assemblv 10 Defroster duct 11 De...

Page 682: ...ng the trim stick remove the defroster garnishes from the instrument panel VENTILATORS AIR INLET AND AIR OUTLET REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION I 1 M55YD Inlet garnishes removal steps 1 Front deck garnish 2 Inlet garnish right 3 Inlet garnish left 2OAOO60 Rear ventilation duct removal steps 4 Rear trunk trim installation screw 5 Trunk side trim left 6 Rear ventilation duct TSB Revision ...

Page 683: ...tor 2010198 Sealant 3M Nut Locking Part No 4171 or equivalent QQQQQQ 2OAO199 I INSPECTION M XcAC AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH for compressor magnetic clutch 1 Remove the air conditioning engine coolant tempera ture switch from the water outlet fitting 2 Immerse the air conditioning engine coolant tempera ture switch in oil and heat by a gas stove or similar method so as to in...

Page 684: ...2 Immerse the engine coolant temperature switch in oil and heat by a gas stove or similar method so as to increase the oil temperature 3 Check to be sure that the engine coolant temperature switch is switched ON when the oil temperature reaches the standard value Standard value lOO 104 C 212 219 F Caution Use engine oil for this test stir it well while heating and do not heat more than necessary I...

Page 685: ...to GROUP 13 ON VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MFI COMPONENTS Crankshaft Position Sensor Inspection Refer to GROUP 13 ON VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MFI COMPONENTS High Tension Cable Spark Test SOHC 8 VALVE 42 Ignition Timing Adjustment for DOHC Engine 40 Ignition Timing Adjustment for SOHC Engine 39 Spark Plug Cable Test 42 Spark Plug Test 42 SPECIFICATIONS 31 General Specifications 31 Service Specifications 32 ...

Page 686: ...94 MD1 49750 V A l2 90 Electronic built in type SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS DOHC FWD M T DOHC AWD M T Battery voltage sensing A3T03392 MD1331 71 12 75 Electronic built in type Battery voltage sensing A3T03393 MD1 36839 12 75 Electronic built in type MWEC Items Specifications Generator Standard value Regulated voltage Ambient temp at voltage regulator V 20 C 4 F 14 2 15 4 20 C 68 F 13 9 14 9 60 C 140 F ...

Page 687: ... the IC voltage regulator thus switching ON and OFF the current to the field coil and thereby controlling the amount of genera tion by the generator Power is supplied to each load from the B termi nal of the generator NOTE The generator relay functions as a back up for the flow of electricity to the field coil if there is a dis connection or damaged wiring of the charging warning light TROUBLESHOO...

Page 688: ...16 4 CHARGING SYSTEM Troubleshooting CHARGING CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM C From 1991 models COMPONENT LOCATION Name Symbol Generator relay A TSB Revision ...

Page 689: ...uble may not be determined Connect a digital voltmeter between the gener ator B terminal and battery terminal Con nect the lead wire of the voltmeter to the B terminal and the lead wire to the battery terminal 6 Connect the battery ground cable 7 Leave the hood open NOTE Voltmeter Ammeter TSB Revision 16KI461 Test 1 Start the engine 3 2 Turn on or off the headlights and small lights and adjust the...

Page 690: ... lead of the ammeter to the 6 terminal and connect the lead wire to the disconnected output wire NOTE Tighten each connection by bolt and nut securely as a heavy current will flow Do not relay on clips 6 Connect a voltmeter 0 to 20V between the 73 terminal and ground Connect the lead wire to the generator B terminal and lead wire to a sound ground 7 Set the engine tachometer and connect the batter...

Page 691: ... temperature before testing again 2 Upon completion of the output current test lower the engine speed to the idle speed and turn off the ignition switch 3 Disconnect the battery ground cable 4 Remove the test ammeter and voltmeter and the engine tachometer 5 Connect the alternator output wire to the gener ator B terminal 6 Connect the battery ground cable 2 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 3 Discon...

Page 692: ... generator is faulty Regulating voltage table I Voltage regulator ambient temperature C OFI Regulating voltage V 14 2 15 4 13 9 14 9 13 4 14 6 80 176 13 1 14 5 2 Upon completion of the test set the engine speed at idle and turn off the ignition switch 3 Disconnect the battery ground cable 4 Remove the test voltmeter and ammeter and the engine tachometer 5 Connect the generator output wire to the g...

Page 693: ...OUP 11 Service Adjustment Procedures 18A1257 4 Water pump pulley l 5 Water pump pulley 6 Generator brace assembly 7 Generator connector connection 8 Generator SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 8 REMOVAL OF GENERATOR 1 Remove the installation bolt of the power steering oil pump and hold the oil pump above the engine mount bracket Use rags etc to prevent scarring or scratching of the rocker cover NOTE Do no...

Page 694: ... bracket l 7 Stator 8 Terminal 9 Plate 10 Regulator and brush holder Il Brush 12 Brush spring 13 Slinger 14 Rectifier 15 Rear bracket SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY SEPARATION OF THE STATOR AND FRONT BRACKET Insert plain screwdriver between front bracket and stator core and pry downward Caution Do not insert screwdriver too deep as there is danger of damage to stator coil TSB Revision I ...

Page 695: ... Finish soldering or unsoldering in as short a time as possible 2 Use care that no undue force is exerted to leads of diodes INSPECTION ROTOR 1 Check rotor coil for continuity Check to ensure that there is continuity between slip rings If resistance is extremely small it means that there is a short If there is no continuity or if there is short circuit replace rotor assembly Resistance value Appro...

Page 696: ...uity in both directions diode is shorted Replace rectifier assembly 2 Negative Rectifier Test Check for continuity between negative rectifier and stator coil lead connection terminal If there is continuity in both direction diode is shorted and rectifier assembly must be replaced 3 Diode Trio Test Check three diodes for continuity by connecting an am meter to both ends of each diode If there is no...

Page 697: ...he brush to where there is a space 2 to 3 mm 079 to I 18 in between the limit line and the end of the brush holder 5 Solder pigtail to brush holder as shown in the illustration SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY 2 INSTALLATION OF ROTOR ASSEMBLY Before rotor is attached to rear bracket insert wire through small hole made in rear bracket to lift brush After rotor has been installed remove the wire 1 TSB R...

Page 698: ...Type ldentrfrcatron No Part No Rated output No of prnlon teeth kW V M T Direct dnve M3T41083 MD1 62837 0 9 l 2 8 A T Reduction drive with planetary gear M 1 T7338 l M 1 T73383 MD 162840 MD 17286 1 2 1 2 l 2 8 DOHC 1 Items 1 M T 1 A T Type ldentrficatron No Part No Rated output No of pinion teeth Reduction drive with planetary gear Reduction drive with planetary gear M3T70481 M lT70483 2 M 1 T73381...

Page 699: ... teeth Reduction drive with planetary gear Reduction dnve with planetary gear M 1 T70483 MlT73383 MD1 72860 MD1 72861 kW V 1 2 1 2 1 2 l 2 8 8 1993 models SOHC Items Type Identification No Part No Rated output No of pinion teeth MIT A T Reduction drive with planetary gear Reduction drive with planetary gear M 1 T70483 M 1 T73383 MD1 72860 MD1 72861 kW V I 211 2 I 2112 8 8 DOHC I Items M T I Type I...

Page 700: ...ning characteristics Terminal voltage V Current A Speed rpm Pinion gap mm in Commutator runout mm in Commutator diameter mm in Undercut depth mm in imit Direct drive type Commutator runout mm in Commutator diameter mm in Reduction drive type Commutator runout m m in Commutator diameter mm in Specifications 11 5 60 or less 6 600 or more 0 5 2 0 020 079 0 05 002 32 1 26 0 5 l 020 11 90 or less 3 000...

Page 701: ... relay and the starter motor the contact magnetic switch of the starter is switched ON and the starter motor is activated NOTE If the ignition switch is switched to the ST position without the clutch pedal being de pressed electricity flows to the starter relay coil the clutch pedal position switch contacts and to ground with the result that the contacts of the starter retay are switched OFF and b...

Page 702: ...iI3 ETACS CONTROL UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1 The starter motor does not operate at all l Check the starter coil l Check for poor contact at the battery termi nals 2 The starter motor doesn t stop l Check the starter magnetic switch NOTE For information concerning the starter relay and theft alarm starter relay refer to P 16 21 22 and for the theft alarm system refer to P 54 165 TSB Revision I ...

Page 703: ... Starter connector l 2 Starter motor 1r on9 Field coil wire 7 E LOO37 Stopper Pinion gap Pinion 6EL003 INSPECTION PINION GAP ADJUSTMENT 1 Disconnect field coil wire from M terminal of magnetic switch 2 Connect a 12V battery between S terminal and M terminal 3 Set switch to ON and pinion will move out Caution This test must be performed quickly in less than 10 seconds to prevent coil from burning 4...

Page 704: ...less than 10 seconds to prevent coil from burning 3 If pinion remains out everything is in order If pinion moves in hold in circuit is open Replace magnetic switch FREE RUNNING TEST 1 Place starter motor in a vise equipped with soft jaws and connect a fully charged 12 volt battery to starter motor as follows 2 Connect a test ammeter loo ampere scale and carbon pile rheostat in series with battery ...

Page 705: ...t be performed quickly in less than 10 seconds to prevent coil from burning 3 Pull pinion out and release If pinion quickly returns to its original position everything is in order If it doesn t replace magnetic switch STARTER RELAY 1 Remove the arter relay from the underside of the relay box _ _ 2 Connect battery to terminal 2 and check continuity be tween terminals with terminal 4 grounded TSB Re...

Page 706: ...lay box 2 Connect battery to terminal 2 and check continuity be tween terminals with terminal 4 grounded Power is supplied 7 3 terminals Continuity I l 3 terminals No continuity Power is not supplied 2 4 terminals Continuity SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 2 INSTALLATION OF STARTER MOTOR Clean both surfaces of starter motor flange and rear plate TSB Revision I ...

Page 707: ...SEMBLY 114 16 6 Disassembly steps I Screw 4 2 Magnetic switch 3 Packing 4 Plate 5 Screw 6 Through bolt 7 Rear bracket 8 Rear bearing l 9 Brush holder assembly IO Yoke assembly 11 Armature 12 Lever 13 Washer l l 14 Snap ring 4 I 15 Stop ring 16 Overrunning clutch 17 Front bracket 10 I 9 8 lELos8 TSB Revision ...

Page 708: ...STOP RING 1 Press stop ring off snap ring with a suitable socket 2 Remove snap ring with snap ring pliers and then remove stop ring and overrunning clutch CLEANING STARTER MOTOR PARTS 1 Do not immerse parts in cleaning solvent Immersing the yoke and field coil assembly and or armature will damage insulation Wipe these parts with a cloth only 2 Do not immerse drive unit in cleaning solvent Overrunn...

Page 709: ... 2 Measure the commutator outer diameter Standard value 32 mm 1 26 in Limit 31 mm 1 22 in 3 Check the undercut depth between segments Standard value 0 5 mm 020 in TESTING FIELD COILS FOR GROUNDING Check the continuity between field brushes If there is continuity the field coil is in order TESTING FIELD COIL FOR GROUNDING Check the continuity between field coil brush and yoke If there is no continu...

Page 710: ...pinion is worn or burred replace overrunning clutch assembly If pinion is damaged also inspect ring gear for wear or burrs FRONT AND REAR BRACKET BUSHING Inspect bushing for wear or burrs If bushing is worn or burred replace front bracket assembly or rear bracket assembly BRUSHES AND SPRINGS REPLACEMENT 1 Brushes that are worn beyond wear limit line or are oil soaked should be replaced 2 When repl...

Page 711: ...to vibrate and be attracted to the core Replace shot ted armature TESTING ARMATURE COIL FOR GROUNDING Check the insulation between each commutator segment and armature coil core If there is no continuity the insulation is in order INSPECTION OF ARMATURE COIL CONTINUITY Check the continuity between segments If there is continuity the coil is in order SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY 15 INSTALLATION OF ...

Page 712: ... 7 Brush 8 Rear bearing 9 Armature y Y e assembly 6ELl96 12 Packing A 13 Packing B 14 Plate 15 Planetary gear 16 Lever l l 17 Snap ring e l 18 Stop ring 19 Overrunning clutch 20 Internal gear 21 Planetary gear holder 22 Front bracket SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY 9 REMOVAL OF ARMATURE 11 BALL Caution When removing the armature take care not to lose the ball which is used as a bearing in the armatu...

Page 713: ... assembly and or armature will damage insulation Wipe these parts with a cloth only 2 Do not immerse drive unit in cleaning solvent Overrunning clutch is pm lubricated at the factory and solvent will wash lubrication from clutch 3 The drive unit may be cleaned with a brush moistened with cleaning solvent and wiped dry with a cloth INSPECTION CHECKING THE COMMUTATOR 1 Place the armature on a pair o...

Page 714: ... rotate in opposite direction If clutch does not function properly replace overrunning clutch assembly 2 Inspect pinion for wear or burrs If pinion is worn or burred replace overrunning clutch assembly If pinion is damaged also inspect ring gear for wear or burrs FRONT AND REAR BRACKET BUSHING Inspect bushing for wear or burrs If bushing is worn or burred replace front bracket assembly or rear bra...

Page 715: ...IRCUIT 1 Place armature in a growler 2 Hold a thin steel blade parallel and just above while rotating armature slowly in growler A shorted armature will cause blade to vibrate and be attracted to the core Replace shorted armature TESTING ARMATURE FOR GROUNDING Check the insulation between the armature coil cores and the commutator segments They are normal if there is no continui ty CHECKING FOR AR...

Page 716: ...ion No Part No Advance mechanism Firing order From 1991 models DOHC Contact pointless type T1T49071 T1T49571 MD121786 MD148855 Controlled by engine control module 1 3 4 2 IGNITION COIL I Items 1 SOHC 8 VALVE 1 DOHC Type Identification No Part No Mold single coil F 088 MD1 04696 Mold dual coil F 089 MD126461 MD149766 MD1 58956 I I 990 models 2 From 1991 models IGNITION POWER TRANSISTOR Items 1 SOHC...

Page 717: ...curb idle speed SOHC DOHC Ignition coil Primary coil resistance at 20 C 68 F R SOHC DOHC Secondary coil resistance at 20 C 68 F kR SOHC DOHC Spark plug gap mm in TROUBLESHOOTING COMPONENT LOCATION 7 N a m e 1 Symbol 1 Specifications 5OBTDC f 2 1O BTDC 8 BTDC Non turbo 12 BTDC Turbo 0 72 0 88 0 77 0 95 10 89 13 31 10 3 13 9 1 0 1 1 39 43 MSGC MlBGHANb TSB Revision ...

Page 718: ...UIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SOHC Up to 1992 models IGN SW1 IG 3 c C B 08 r CONDENSER 4 n 1 IGNITION COIL B 07 1 I 2 WB I 1 WB 7 C 08 DISTRIBUTOR s SPARK PLUG INPUT SIGNAL c 11 3 I 1 5 f 3 COMBINATION METER TACHO KX35 AC H0311 NW 1 TSB Revision I l 2L I c 13 c 3 ...

Page 719: ...shooting 16 35 SOHC From 1993 models ON CONDENSER II B 02 3 JMM TOR _ _ _______________ PI 1 II I IGNITION COIL SPARK PLUG 5v TV f r 0 __ 43 r 1 I I I I IGNITION IPOWER TRANSISTOR B 02 4 I B 06 Es 3 j COMBINATION TSB Revision ...

Page 720: ...T CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DOHC 1989 models IGl I 7 T C 08 I A T I I E W __ 3 I B 06 Iis COMBINATION METERCTACHO 42 g I J 1 T I 41 I 1 t i I G N I T I O N 6 9 3 t 5 i4 _ 5 t m 55 IGNITION POWER TRANSISTOR B 09 l ii 1 412 3 SPARK PLUG 35 AC H03 3 NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 721: ...6 37 DOHC 1990 models IGNITION TFH 3 0 d C 08 W I t 1 B 06 3 m 7 2 7 COMBINATION METERCTACHO MFI fj y ROL INPUT SIGNAL f AIR FLOW ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR q Efl IGNITION COIL B 07 ENGINE SPEED DETECTION CONNECTOR 35AC H03Y2 NW TSB Revision ...

Page 722: ... SYSTEM Troubleshooting IGNITION CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DOHC From 1991 models IGNITION wH ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR q n IGNITION COIL B 07 4 12 3 SPARK PLUG ENGINE SPEED DETECTION CONNECTOR 35 AC H0317 NW 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 723: ... the scan tool to the data link connector 3 Connect a timing light Caution 1 The connector contact should not be separated 2 The paper clip should be inserted along the terminal surface 3 The paper clip should be inserted at the correct side If it is inserted incorrectly the paper clip may become caught and cannot be removed For male pin Insert to the lock tab side For female pin Insert to the sid...

Page 724: ...e idling ignition timing is the correct timing Actual ignition timing 1O BTDC NOTE 1 Ignition timing may vary slightly but this is not a problem 2 There may be more spark advance at high altitudes but this is not a problem IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT FOR DOHC ENGINE Mlffilll 1 The vehicle should be prepared as follows before the inspection and adjustment l Engine coolant temperature 85 95 C 185 205...

Page 725: ...ed so the actual engine rpm in two times the indicated value shown by the tachometer 6 Turn the ignition switch OFF 7 With the engine stopped connect a jumper wire clips to the terminal for ignition timing adjustment and ground it NOTE Grounding the terminal for ignition timing adjustment will cause the ignition timing to enter the basic state 8 Start and run the engine at curb idle speed 9 Check ...

Page 726: ... check whether the engine s running performance changes or not Caution Wear rubber gloves while doing so 2 If the engine performance does not change check the resistance of the spark plug cable and check the spark plug itself SPARK PLUG TEST I Remove the spark plug and connect to the spark plug cable 21 Ground the spark plug outer electrode body and crank the engine Check to be sure that there is ...

Page 727: ...tem IGNITION SYSTEM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION SOHC 8 VALVE 16 43 M16GJAPa 2 20 30 Nm Removal steps I 4 1 Spark plug cable 2 Spark plug 4 3 High tension cable I 4 Distributor 5 Ignition coil 6 ignition power transistor TSB Revision ...

Page 728: ... well l Damaged or broken gasket l Burnt condition of porcelain insulator at spark gap Dark deposit of carbon indicates too rich a fuel mixture or extremely low air intake Also misfiring due to excessive spark gap is suspected White burn indicates too lean a fuel mixture or excessively advanced ignition timing Also insufficient plug tightening is suspected 2 Clean with a plug cleaner Use an air gu...

Page 729: ...e 1 5V power supply to terminal of the ignition power transistor then check whether there is continuity between terminal I and termi nal when terminal 0 and the positive terminal are connected and disconnected NOTE Connect the negative probe of the circuit tester to ter minal 0 2 Replace the ignition power transistor if there is a malfunc tion SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 4 INSTALLATION OF DISTR...

Page 730: ...tall the spark plug cable clamps as shown in the illustration 2 The numerals on the support and clamp indicate the spark plug cable No 3 Pay attention to the following items when the spark plug cables are installed 1 Install the cables securely to avoid possible contact with metal parts 2 Install the cables neatly ensuring they are not too tight loose twisted or kinked 16 46 IGNITION SYSTEM Igniti...

Page 731: ...N SOHC 16 VALVE 0 4 12 Nm 9 ft lbs 25 Nm 6EN0729 Removals steps 1 1 4 Spark plug cable Spark plug Distributor O ring INSPECTION SPARK PLUG Refer to P 16 45 for inspection procedures SPARK PLUG CABLE 1 Check cap and coating for cracks 2 Measure resistance Unit k 2 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 732: ...upply to terminal of the ignition power transistor then check whether there is continuity between terminal and termi nal when terminal and the positive terminal are connected and disconnected NOTE Connect the negative probe of the circuit tester to ter minal Termin U l ina 1 TerminEiG iT 1 2 Replace the ignition power transistor if there is a malfunc tion SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLAT...

Page 733: ...arrange the spark plug cables properly by the following procedure 1 Install the spark plug cable clams as shown in the illus tration 2 The numerals on the support and clamp indicate the spark plug cable No 3 Pay attention to the following items when the spark plug cables are installed 1 Install the cables securely to avoid possible contact with metal parts 2 Install the cables neatly ensuring they...

Page 734: ...t lbs 2 20 30 Nm 0 14 22 ft lbs lo 13 Nm 7 9 ftlbs 15 22 Nm 20 27 Nm 14 20 ft lbs lo 12 Nm 7 9 ftlbs Removal steps 1 Center cover i 2 Spark plug cable 3 Spark plug 4 ignition coil 5 Ignition power transistor 6 Throttle body stay I 7 Crankshaft position sensor TSB Revision 6 ...

Page 735: ...Measurement of the primary coil resistance 2 Measure the resistance between connector terminals 4 and 2 the coils at the No 1 and No 4 cylinder sides of the ignition coil and between terminals 4 and 1 the coils at the No 2 and No 3 cylinder sides Standard value 0 77 0 95 EL0138 From 1990 models 1 Measurement of the primary coil resistance 2 Measure the resistance between connector terminals 3 and ...

Page 736: ...ignition power transistor then check whether there is continuity between terminal I and termi nal I when terminal and the positive f terminal are connected and disconnected NOTE Connect the negative probe of the circuit tester to ter minal 0 Terminal and terminal Connected Unconnected Terminal and terminal I Continuity No continuity No NO 4 coil side 1 Connect the negative terminal of the 1 5V pow...

Page 737: ...transistor then check whether there is continuity between terminal and termi nal when terminal I and the positive terminal are connected and disconnected NOTE Connect the negative probe of the circuit tester to ter minal 0 Terminal and terminal Terminal and terminal I mark Notch 6EN0290 Connected I Continuity I Unconnected No continuity I If the problem is still evident after checking as described...

Page 738: ...procedure 1 Install the spark plug cable clamps as shown in the illustration 2 The numerals on the support and clamp indicate the spark plug cable No 3 Pay attention to the following items when the spark plug cables are installed 1 Install the cables securely to avoid possible contact with metal parts 2 Install the cables neatly ensuring they are not too tight loose twisted or kinked The spark plu...

Page 739: ...odels 8 VALVE 2 4 3 I I Disassembly steps I Distributor cap 2 Packing 3 Contact carbon 4 Rotor 5 Lead wire 6 Sorina pin 4ee4 7 Gkar 8 O ring 9 Distributor housing 6EL0109 I v From 1991 models 8 VALVE Disasseml steps 1 Distributor cap 2 Packing 4 Rotor 8 O r i n g 9 Distributor housing TSB Revision ...

Page 740: ...ification mark for the drive gear on the distributor shaft 2 Place the gear on a soft base wooden block so that the spring pin can come out 3 Punch out the spring pin by using a pin punch INSPECTION Check the following points repair or replace if a problem is found CAP ROTOR 1 There must be no cracking in the cap 2 There must be no damage to the cap s electrode or the rotor s electrode 3 Clean awa...

Page 741: ...e at the time of disassembly and install the gear to the distributor shaft TSB Revision 2 When aligning the driven gear s mating mark and the housing s mating marks make the combination so that notch A at the shaft end is at the position shown in the figure and then align the spring pin hole and drive in a new spring pin Caution Drive in the spring pin so that the slits are at a right angle relati...

Page 742: ...NOTES ...

Page 743: ...p Light 96 Rear Combination Light 95 Relay Rheostat Service Adjustment Procedures Special Tools Specifications General Specifications Sealants and Adhesives Service Specifications Troubleshooting METERS AND GAUGES Meters and Gauges Service Adjustment Procedures Inspection Specifications General Specifications Sealants and Adhesives Service Specifications Torque Specifications Troubleshooting 97 99...

Page 744: ... O F I Reserve capacity min A 55624R S MF 40 433 79 NOTES 1 CRANKING RATING is the current a greater at a specified temperature 2 RESERVE CAPACITY RATING is the voltage of 10 5 at 26 7 C 80 F battery can deliver for 30 seconds and maintain a terminal voltage of 7 2 or amount of time a battery can deliver 25A and maintain a minimum terminal TSB Revision ...

Page 745: ...ts on for 15 seconds 0 Turn headlights off for 2 minutes to allow battery voltage to stabilize l Disconnect cables l Read open circuit voltage A4 1 LOAD TEST b CHARGE battery at 5 Blue dot invisible and amps then GO to A3 open circuit voltage under 12 4 volts l Connect a load tester to the battery 0 Load the battery at the recommended discharge rate see LOAD TEST RATE CHART for 15 seconds l Read v...

Page 746: ... rubber gloves not the house hold type should be worn when removing battery by hand 3 Inspect battery carrier for damage caused by loss of acid from battery If acid damage is present it will be necessary to clean area with a solution of clean warm water and baking soda Scrub area with a stiff bristle brush and wipe off with a cloth moistened with ammonia or baking soda in water 4 Clean top of batt...

Page 747: ... etc CHARGE RATE If the test indicator is white the battery should be charged as outlined below OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST 3 1 Turn headlights on for 15 seconds 2 Turn headlights off for 2 minutes to allow battery voltage to stabilize 3 Disconnect cables 4 Read open circuit voltage 5 If the open circuit voltage is under 12 4 volts charge the battery See BATTERY CHARGING LOAD TEST 4 1 Connect a load...

Page 748: ...eering lock cylinder Cover Key interlock cable Slide lever Horn pad Refer to P 54 101 Steering wheel Refer to P 54 101 Column switch Key reminder switch segment NOTE indicates vehicles with M safety lock system SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 5 REMOVAL OF THE STEERING LOCK CYLINDER 1 Insert the key in the steering lock cylinder and turn it to the ACC position 2 Using a cross tip screwdriver small or a s...

Page 749: ... 3 4 2 5 1 7 8 9 1 2 Removed o o LOCK I I I I I I o o Inserted o u o o r I 1 I START o 3 qq 1 1 1 NOTE 1 O O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals 2 O O indicates vehicles with ETACS SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 8 INSTALLATON O F T H E S L I D E LEVERi7 K E Y INTERLOCK CABLE STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY SIDE 1 With the ignition key either at the LOCK position or removed install the ...

Page 750: ... control indicator light W Anti lock brake warning light W Check engine malfunction indicator lamp Power indicator light W Economy indicator light W 20verdrive OFF indicator light W AA shift position indicator light W Park Reverse Neutral Drive Second Low W NOTE 1 The values in parentheses denote SAE trade numbers 2 The l symbol indicates vehicles with anti lock braking system 3 The symbol indicat...

Page 751: ...or mph 20 19 22 40 38 44 60 57 66 80 76 88 100 94 l 10 Tachometer indication error wm Type 1 8 000 rpm indication 700 I00 3 000 150 6 000 300 Type 2 9 000 rpm indication 700 100 3 000 225 100 7 000 400 100 Operation range of fuel gauge unit mm in FWD Point F 45 6k2 5 1 79k l Point E 177 5 2 6 98 2 08 AWD Point F 43 1 69 Point E 174 6 85 Fuel gauge unit resistance 52 Point F 3f2 Point E 110 7 Engin...

Page 752: ...om Jan 1989 Between A 0 Between A C Between B C Specifications Q Approx 130 Approx 53 Approx 162 Approx 146 Approx 60 Approx 206 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Items Engine coolant temperature gauge unit N m 10 12 ft lbs 7 8 SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES M54HF Items Specified sealant and Adhesive Engine coolant temperature gauge unit 3M ATD Part No 8660 or equivalent I TSB Revision ...

Page 753: ...54 P 1 NOTES ...

Page 754: ... __ ____ ___ __ ___ _ _ WITH WITHOUT METER COLOR METER COLOR CHANGER SWITCH CHANGER SWITCH r I METER COLOR CHANGER SWITCH I _ _ _ ___ ___ __ ________________________ 10 Ti6 C 50 ii2 3515 AWD FWD J C TAIL RHEOSTAT E 01 m J C RHEO J C GROUND P m F 21 1 i pmq 4 1 I I I 3 I C I I I I I I I I I I I I FUEL r 2 G 03 j 8KE m3 m j I e J D 26 35 AC Hl014 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 755: ...METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshooting 54 13 COIL ELS IN STOR MFI CONTROL UNIT RHEOSTAT I 2 POWER T Cl990 M 1234 Ell 7 c 43 56 8 1 J B 3 0 _ _ 3 c 00 C 1234 m 5678 z 13 t3 a 1C TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT u B 01 p J m cl 1 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 756: ... GAUGES Troubleshooting L 3 5 c 44 c 32 3 COMBINATION 1 1 c 52 METER I _ ___ ___ _ m WITH 0 METER CO k OR WITHOUT METER COLOR CHANGER WITCH CHANGER SWITCH I 1 I I METER COLOR I CHANGER SWITCH II II IIII I I I I I I I I I I I 1 6 C 50 F z AWD F 25 J C J C TAIL RHEO s RHEOSTAT E 01 T r 1 D 26 TSB Revision ...

Page 757: ...IG1 L 10A 8 IGNITIJ POWER m c TROL UNIT NSISTOR lJ b I j 17m 14 m m J B ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT B 01 4 cl El Remarks tA UP t o 1 9 9 2 models B XC ii F r o m 1 9 9 3 m d Is OHCWP t o 1898 m o d e l s UNIT 3 C 08 RHEOSTAT C 38 TSB Revision ...

Page 758: ...54 16 METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshooting WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1989 models KM AC HlOOZ N BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR A 62 1G 03 Jg TSB Revision ...

Page 759: ...METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshootinn 54 17 KEY REMI i B 17 Es GENERATOR L TERM I NALJ C l MFI tEFoL r C 52 5 TSB Revision 13 4 B T 1ER SWITCH s g T ABI co1 ER UN 17 c 50 ROS ...

Page 760: ...RCUIT DIAGRAM 1990 models WITH WITHOUT ETACS ETACS L OFI I I lr ixifi SWITCH DOOR SWITCH D 45 m ON 1 n IP 314 5 6J7 2 SC 52 G I 2 1 1ul13 12 12 14 1 1 17 COMBINATION METER c 09 AWD FWD r BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR A 62 XkE UNIT G 03 Q 3 AC HlOlB NY TSB Revision ...

Page 761: ...METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshootina 54 19 E 3 3 3 T II 3 0 C 23 3 C 52 g 7 i 1 I big 3 g ROL TSB Revision ...

Page 762: ...0 METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshooting WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM I E C From 1991 models 11 II I L tp pZ WITH WITHOUT I z ETACS ETAFS t DOOR SWITCH D 45 ml D 26 I 1 1 TSB Revision I 4 FUEL mwE G 03 ...

Page 763: ...7553 OIL GENERATOR EREfRE L TERMINAL C OS 13 5 c J B 7c 6 4 cAL d c 11 4 3 _ 3 C 52 7 I 1 ELC 4SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE AUTOMATIC ABS SEATBELT CONTROL FROL UNIT Remarks l l Non Turbo FWD AWD M T 2 2 Non Turbo AWD A T Turbo Z SOHC UP to 1992 models and DOHC 4 4 SOHC From 1993 models TSB Revision ...

Page 764: ...ATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM cl989 models FE TCH ZN NAL TCH TAI REL IGHT 1 DEDICATED FUSE J B r I C 32 3 p Tzaq c 39 _ _ I1 2 I e L 6 3 BY l 5 C 16 J C RHEO m 2 c 40 J C 3 GROUND m 16 C 32 J B t RHEOSTAT E 01 m 15 AC H1012 NY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 765: ...oting 54 23 lEUTRAL ON SWITCH z i 2 5 15 ___ 3 al E I 9 a I J B c 39 IGNITION SWITCH IG1 i 77 1 I i 7 C 58 1 c 51 pil Iq E 3 CONTROL ACTUATOR I6 55 C 23 ___ _ I l4 C 52 COLUMN SWITCH t PASSING AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT TSB Revision ...

Page 766: ...ATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1990 models POWER ECONOMY iZ jf E OVER I 3c TCH YE 5 I r u r 0 C 37 C 32 J B I I I 0 C 32 p7zmsJq 2 ____ _ _ _ _____ 6 0 BY 1 J C RHEOj RHEOSTAT E 01 pF5i q J C GROUND c 40 pRiz mq I KX35 AC HlOY3 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 767: ...METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshooting 54 25 PARK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH IGNI SWITl I3 e Oh 4 i AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT COLU J h 3WITCH DIMMER PASSING SWiTCHj 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 768: ... models 35 AC HIOYO NY IGHT f E r TURN 3 ARD TCH SIGNAL Ei SWITCH _ 3 z kc E G s 14 u c5 1 I I I I 3 f J _ 11 g 14 82 52 15 __ 3WER ONOMY jIK OVER 84 T T a _ _ _ _ 6 c 40 J C GROUND I I1 1 k ZE I CH n 1 2 2 4 5 8 7 8 161 l3 llll2ll3ll4llsk6ll 0 BY a 5 C 16 J C RHEO 6 C 32 1J B TSB Revision ...

Page 769: ...B c 39 5 5 z 2 0 p3TzRq E E 5 14 2 2 2 6 15 2 7 ___ ___ l6 c 58 F I ETACS iC TROL NITI IITCH L I i z 8_ 1 ON IGl 7 c 43 I 1 IF BACATED _ _ __ _ l4 C 52 n L1 ll2 3l4 5f6 7 2 I 0 1 16 1 12 13 1 15 16 17 0 II Al I COLUMN SWITCH PASSING AUTO CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 770: ...ision 54 28 METERS AND GAUGES Troubleshooting OPERATION Fuel gauge l When the ignition key is at the ON position the fuel gauge is activated l When there is much fuel the unit s resistance is small and the current flowing in the circuit is great so the gauge s indicator indicates in the F area l When there is little fuel the unit s resistance is high and the current flowing in the circuit is small...

Page 771: ...ront tires Rear wheel safety procedures 1 Be sure to chock both rear wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Secure the stoppers to the floor or take measures to prevent the stoppers from slipping 2 Make sure the parking brake has been set Front wheel away prevention procedure 1 Attach tension bars to the front traction hook Secure the ends of both bars to anchor plates 2 Make sure the tension o...

Page 772: ...rpm 6 000 rpm f300 rpm Type 2 9 000 rpm indication 700 rpm flO0 rpm 3 000 rpm 7 000 rpm 2 vm 100 vm Caution As the tachometer is negative grounded do not connect battery conversely to prevent damaging transistor and diode Connect the engine speedometer 1 Insert the paper clip from behind the connector Caution Insert the paper clip parallel to the terminal surface as shown in the figure at left 2 C...

Page 773: ... or resistance between gauge terminals refer to P 54 34 or break in harness Replace or repair defective parts ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE SIMPLE IN SPECTION M54HIOK 1 Remove connector from engine coolant temperature gauge unit in engine compartment 2 Ground harness side connector via test light 12V 3 4W 3 Turn ON ignition key 4 Check that test light goes on and gauge needle moves 5 If test li...

Page 774: ...m 1 69 in Point E 174 mm 6 85 in Standard Resistance of Fuel Gauge Unit 1 Check that resistance value between the fuel gauge terminal and ground terminal is at standard value when fuel gauge unit float is at point F highest and point E lowest Standard value Point F 3 2 R Point E 11027 R 2 Check that resistance value changes smoothly when float moves slowly between point F highest and point E lowes...

Page 775: ...from intake manifold Standard Resistance of Engine Coolant Temperature Gatige Unit 1 Immerse unit in 70 C 158 F water to measure resistance Standard value 104 13 5 R 2 After checking apply the specified sealant around the thread of engine coolant temperature gauge unit and install on the intake manifold Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No 8660 or equivalent M54HJAR WA0538 Removal steps 1 Trip counter...

Page 776: ...icle interior release the lock by turning the adapter to the left or right and then remove the adapter INSPECTION REED SWITCH INSPECTION Use circuit tester to check circuit repeats off on between terminals when speedometer shaft turned several times FUEL GAUGE CIRCUIT INSPECTION Measure resistance between terminals with circuit tester Standard value A B Approx 203 Q A C Approx 102 52 B C Approx 10...

Page 777: ...13 Meter color changer switch DOHC 14 Printed circuit board 15 Meter case INDICATORS M54HKAXa Symbol Operation 44 Turn signal indicator This indicator flashes as do the same side of turn signal light flashes If the turn signal light is burnt out the indicator flashes faster than normal indicator This indicator is common with hazard light High beam indicator Li s dicator illuminates when the headli...

Page 778: ...ff after the engine has started This indicator comes on when the drive belt breaks or the trouble occurs in the charging system Oil pressure warning This indicator comes on when the ignition key is in ON position and goes off after the engine has started This indicator comes on when the oil fails or the trouble occurs in the oil circulating system while driving Overdrive OFF indicator The light wi...

Page 779: ...temperature becomes abnormally high SECURITY light Vehicles with theft alarm system Illuminates for about 20 seconds when the theft alarm system can be set and then the illumination stops 4WS 4 wheel steering system fluid level warning light With the ignition switch in the ON position the warning light is illuminated if the 4WS fluid level falls less than the specific level TSB Revision ...

Page 780: ...ear side marker light CP Rear combination light Turn signal light CP Stop and tail light CP Back up light CP License plate light CP High mounted stop light CP nterior lights Front dome light D o m e l i g h t W Spot light W r4Rear dome light Dome light W Spot light W Door light W Luggage compartment light W Specifications 65 55 27 3 8 5 3 32 3212 32 3 4 or 221 310 8 8 8 5 5 TSB Revision NOTE l DOH...

Page 781: ...ght High mounted stop light Non turbo Vehicles without air spoiler Non turbo Vehicles with air spoiler Turbo iterior lights Front dome light Dome light Spot light Rear dome light 2 Dome light Spot light Door light Luggage compartment light NOTE I Vehicles with sunroof 2 Vehicles without sunroof 3 Vehicles built up to 1992 models 4 Vehicles built from 1993 models Specifications W 65 w 55 W 27 3 27 ...

Page 782: ...ions Headlight intensity Type 1 cd 18 000 or more Type II cd 7 000 or more SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES M54lH Item Connection of rear combination light and body Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No 8625 or equivalent SPECIAL TOOLS For the number refer to GROUP 00 Precautions Before Service I 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 783: ...LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting 54 41 TROUBLESHOOTING HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM E IEAD IGHT models SIBLE IGNITION I SW ITCH ACC I J 4 J B r h c 43 234 c9 m 5678 I 16 C 23 m 1 CL m l3 C 69 ...

Page 784: ...RCUIT DIAGRAM 1990 models SUB FUSIBLE IGNI LINK 0 SWIT I e c J B 2 cb IEAD IGHT HEADLIGHT RELAY A 01X ______ __ _ _ El 84 __ _ rION ACC c 43 4 I 284 7 liEa 5878 1284 El 5878 4 A 12 1 t 4 C 23 p C 69 p 12 b I CL m I3 I m I Ea cu l l 6 85 AC HOWSIN TSB Revision ...

Page 785: ...les without theft alarm system SUB FUSIBLE IGNI LINK QJ SWII I LEFT SIDE m A 17 c 1 TYPE 2 G z A 22CU G T HEADLIGHT z 3 RELAY A 03X __ ___ El OFF TON 84 1 2 2 RL T 2 1 y 1 iYPE 2 MZ 1 1 TYPE 1 TYPE I Lo C 26 l C 23 COLUMN SWITCH 3 AC HOBBO NN TSB Revision ...

Page 786: ...arm system SUB FUSIBLE L INK go JGNJTJON SW1 TCH AC0 EAD IGHT 1 FiE 1 m i 17 2 9 1 TYPE 2 aa A 22 i IGGHT A 01X ___ CATEI 2 THEFT ALARM gEifi IGHT AL A 38 l 5 m 1 2 3 468 4 1 k c r 3 P u 2 z 0 5 r L 4 C 23 Z I 2 5 c 04 A ETACS CONTROL UNIT 2 COLUMN SWITCH C 68 e J co 1 3 C 69 T N i AC H0883 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 787: ... is activated thus indicating that the headlights high beam is illuminated TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1 Headlights don t come on 1 But the tail lights do illuminate l Check the headlight relay l Check the lighting switch 2 The tail lights also don t illuminate l Check the sub fusible link No 2 The low beam at both sides doesn t illuminate l Check the ground 3 The upper beam at both sides doesn t illumi...

Page 788: ...54 46 FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting TSB Revision ...

Page 789: ...se fog light relay fog light switch dimmer switch and ground causing the fog light relay TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1 The right or left fog lights only go on l Check the bulb 2 Fog lights do not go on when the fog light switch is set at ON l Check the dedicated fuse 0 contacts to close l Once the fog light relay contacts have closed current flows through the dedicated fuse fog light relay contacts fog ...

Page 790: ...R LIGHT AND LICENCE PLATE LIGHT CIRCUIT IRCUIT DIAGRAM cl989 models SUB FUSIBLE LINK fl IGHT A 02X ffl 34 l4 C 23 1OAb z FRONT k2 A 16 fydB NATION COMBINATION LEFT SIDE z RIGHT SIDE 3 I COLUMN SWITCH 13 C 69 I g 5 F 21 65 y u REAR COMBINATION 35AC H0646 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 791: ...LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting 54 49 F 11 lEEGil 5 3 I L I CENSE PLATE LIGHT F 03 m z 2 1 1 ml 2 TSB Revision I ...

Page 792: ... LIGHT SIDE MARKER LIGHT AND LICENSE PLATE LIGHT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1990 models SUB FUSIBLE LINK m T A I L L I G H T 1 R E L A Y J A 02X q FwATED 2o C 23 A 12 1 3 y C O L U M N S W I T C H t F 25 FWD AWD z Remcr ks 1 FWD 2 f2 AWLl 3 AC HOW NM TSB Revision I ...

Page 793: ...LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting 54 51 TSB Revision ...

Page 794: ...NSE PLATE LIGHT C I R C U I T CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SUB FUSIBLE LINK From 1991 models 0 EFT SIDE 5f 1 POS ITION v POSIT I ON i3t 1 RIGHT 51 Y 1 COLUMN SWITCH q J B kmA RIL 3 C 69 5 7 t F 25 FWD AWD F 22 S al m d 1 ii Rcmar ks I I FWD 2 X AWD C3 3 1991 m o d e l s KX35 AC HO885 Nil 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 795: ...ght relay is switched ON when the lighting switch is set to the TAIL or HEAD position l As a result electricity flows via dedicated fuse No to each light and each light illuminates TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1 All lights do not illuminate I The headlights also do not illuminate l Check sub fusible link No Qj 2 The headlights illuminate l Check the tail light relay l Check dedicated fuse No I TSB Revisi...

Page 796: ...ITY MIRROR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Up to 1990 models SUB FUSI BLI B i J B F OS GE COMPARTMENT B En F 04 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH 3 LJNt t IA L 2 3 B l 2 m I TSB Revision IGHT RELAY c 37 I C 32 J C TAJ L E 05 GLOVE BOX JLLUMJNATJON LIGHT i ...

Page 797: ...and multipurpose fuse No 0 to the luggage compartment light l When the trunk lid is opened the luggage compartment light switch is switched ON and the luggage compartment light illuminates Glove compartment light l The tail light relay is switched ON when the lighting switch is set to the TAIL or HEAD position l When with the lighting switch at the TAIL or HEAD position the glove compartment is op...

Page 798: ...YSTEM Troubleshooting DOME LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without ETACS and door light Up to 1990 models DOME LIGHT 4 c 35 J B Y LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH Ix3s Ac woN4o YY ...

Page 799: ...hooting Vehicles without ETACS and door light From 1991 models 54 57 SUB FUSIELE LINK0 I WME LIGHT D 09 E52 1 4 c 35 piJ J J B I 1 I L I LEFT SIDE RIGHT SlDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR WOR SWITCH TSB Revision ...

Page 800: ...ng DOME LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM VEHICLES WITHOUT ETACS WITH DOOR LIGHT Up to 1990 models DOME LIGHT MAP LIGHT DOME LIGHT M D 10 D 13 Ia J B LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 801: ... illuminates when any door is opened while the dome light switch is at the DOOR position TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1 The dome light does not illuminate 1 The clock is stopped also l Check multipurpose fuse No 2 The dome light does not illuminate when with the dome light switch at the DOOR position any door is opened l Check the bulb l Check the dome light switch l The dome light switches OFF when all ...

Page 802: ...Up to 1990 models SUB FUSIBLE LINK 0 I J B A1 C 36 B T I DOME LIGHl D 13 A I J MAP L IGHT D 09 3 f kzq 4 DOME LIGHT I 16 Q C 40 DATA LINK CONNECTOR REVERSE SIDE pEzT q m q 38 J B E I 3 D 33 D 24 I r T LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIi E 3 D 21 I FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH 3 AC HO841 NY TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 803: ...LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting VEHICLES WITH ETACS Non Turbo From 1991 models SUB FL J B J B I 3 I 1 c 37 1 i353 834 9 A 07 2X L2Eil 2 C 37 l 334 3 1 c 35 yrrzTs7 E Kzt F WITH SUNROOF J B TSB Revision ...

Page 804: ... VEHICLES WITH ETACS Non Turbo From 1991 models CONTINUED J B J B DATA LINK 9 CONNECTOR C 18 FRDNT BIDE piLi mTm REVERSE SIDE J GND I I Y D 33 i D 24 1 D 22 1 D 21 1 TSB Revision La LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH ...

Page 805: ...M VEHICLES WITH ETACS Turbo From 1991 models SUB FUSI J B 43 r 101 C J B r ml E LINK i5 1 C 36 1 c 37 1 El 234 4 A 07 2X 1m lea4 IOD OR STORAGE 3 CONNECTOR izE l 2 C 37 1 le 34 3 1 c 35 Ez tiS I WITH SUNROOF DOME LIGHT D 13 4 DOME LIGHT J B C x35 Ac uotwo xx 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 806: ...CLES WITH ETACS Turbo From 1991 models CONTINUED J B J B I c 04 F GND V FRONT SIDE REVERSE BIDE 54 64 LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE FRONT DOOR SWITCH REAR DOOR SWITCH 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 807: ...SIDE RIGHT SIDE D 19 P D 24 I ffi i 2 E LINK C 36 a 1 El J B c 44 LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SID REAR DOOR SWITCH FRONT DOOR SWITCH Remarks 1 The wire cross section area and colors i the q sYmbol are Vehicles without ETA 2 The wire cross section area and colors i the AsYmbol are Vehicles with ETACS 36 AC HOBlS N 1E ndi cated by ndicated bY 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 808: ... EM DOOR 8 LEFT SIDE D 35 1 I 5 2 F P D 24 q D 33 LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT S I DE L I I REAR DOOR SWITCH FRONT DOOR SWITCH Remarks 1 The wire cross section area and colors indicated by the q svmboi are Vehicles without ETACS 2 The wire cross section area and colors indicated bY the AsYmbol are Vehicles with ETACS Et AC HO842 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 809: ...1 COMBINATION METER 127 WITHOUT 9 T3 S L ETptCS 3 fgs DOOR LEFT SIDE 0 D 35 I LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE Y I r I REAR DOOR SWITCH Remarks FRONT DOOR SWITCH 1 The wire cross section area and colors indicated by the q symbol are Vehicles without ETACS 2 The wire cross section area and colors indicated by the ASYmbOl are Vehicles with ETACS 135AC HOWl NH 3 t mark indicates Vehicles wit...

Page 810: ...LIGHT CIRCUIT C IRCUIT DIAGRAM M T 1989 models IGNITION TFH I 7 c 43 J B r h m A 41 gj TSR Revision I 2 1 M T 1990 models IGNITION WF 7 c 43 J B 63 101 7 c 37 Y R 1 d 2 F 25 REAR COMBINATION h t S 1 DE KXJI AC liOE55 NY Ial Kx55 Ac noozo Y ia ...

Page 811: ...LIGHTING SYSTEM Troubleshooting 54 69 M T From 1991 models IGNITION SWITCI 1 IGl J B 7 A 41 K35 AC HOW NY s TSB Revision ...

Page 812: ...L POSITION SWITCH A 43 RIGHT SIDE PARK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH A 43 FWD AWD TSB Revision Remarks t1 UP to l 2 moaels 2 From 1993 models m AC tloe Y IOWS AC NOO55 W OPERATION l When with the ignition switch at the ON posi tion the shift lever or the selector lever is moved to the R position the backup light switch M T is switched ON or the park neu tral position switch A T is switched to the R posi...

Page 813: ...nected the result is an overall increase of the resistance for the entire light circuitry resulting is a decrease of the voltage at the Rl part within the flasher unit As a result of this being detected the lower limit potential set by COM3 is increased with the result that the time required for charging of the capacitor becomes shorter COMPONENT LOCATION Name 1 Symbol 1 I Turn signal and hazard f...

Page 814: ...IAGRAM 1989 models IGNITION TFH BATTERY TAILI DEDICATED FUSE i w I I j i 1 _ I _______ ___ ____ I J B r 63 10A 1 L L i _ ____ ______ __ J C I 7 TAIL IGHT RELAY 1 0 1 I 6 z 4 E 13 r 1 IL J C RHEO TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD FLASHER UNIT 5 E 01 m 1 RHEOSTAT J C GROUND 35 AC H0936 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 815: ...ND HAZARD FLASHER UNIT i ii wA E J C GROUND r L C 3 2 183 34 c 39 p73iEmq COMBINATION METER c 52 glzEa y L c E 1L m 4 16 C 32 J B J 1234 m 5673 F 25 n _ REAR COMBINATION LIGHT RIGHT SIDE c FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT RIGHT SIDE TURN RH A 31 7 cl I J Q ii v 6 TSB Revision ...

Page 816: ...T DIAGRAM 1990 models IGNITION SW I I I 37 TAIL1 F HCATED Ki CATED C 1 I 1 __ _ ____ _ ___ _ J B r 63 10A t i I IGH T RELAY I 1234 m 3 c 37 5E76 1 1 I 3 E 13 r TAIL 6 I 1I 0 z I I 11 I z m r J C RHEO TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD FLASHER UNIT c 17 7 i9 23 WiiJI 1 RHEOSTAT J C GROUND TSB Revision ...

Page 817: ... WR J C GROUND 7 G G pzf sq 3 5 c 39 6 F 25 i t FWD C 1 REAR COMBINATION s LIGHT RIGHT SIDE 5 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT l RIGHT SIDE1 fly 23 2 m LA TURN RH a A 31 d m cu A 6 Remarks l l FWD 2 2 AWD k J t s j 12 15 n n COMBINATION i F METER I t C 52 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT LEFT SIDE 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 818: ...URN SIGNAL LIGHT AND HAZARD LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM From 1991 models IGNITION VET BATTERY T T TAILLIGHT RELAY FBECATED 0 1 1 s6 C 37 k __ _________________ 10A J C RHEO TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD FLASHER UNIT 35 AC HOQ47 NY TSB Revision I ...

Page 819: ...ARD FLASHER NIT i i8k l HAZARD SWITCH J C GROUND F m c 39 i L 3 I I 7 I v L 1 E 7 l r 14 c 39 3 9 rns2 52 pFTqzEE 1 Y _______ 4 c 37 9 C 42 3 TURBO 7 F 25 k I c COMBINATION METER C 52 gfFiK q NON TURBO NON TURBO A TURBO FRONT YE SIGNAL LEFT SIDE GNAL SIDE I m TSB Revision ...

Page 820: ...oting STOP LIGHT CIRCUIT IRCUIT DIAGRAM VEHICLES WITHOUT AUTO CRUISE CONTROL Up to 1990 models F 22 I 2 m 3456 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT LEFT SIDE J B I I 3 1 F 21 1 2 m 3452 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT RIGHT SIDE ws AC n0834 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 821: ...ISE CONTROL From 1991 models In op N I J B 1 kc 1 25 G s 1 25 R 1 F 11 CY F 09 m Ki I s i HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT REAR LID a1 F 25 LIGHT LEFT SIDE F 12 3 gj w I AWD m 2 f I f fj ID RIGHT SIDE F 03 1 pJJ 2 F 11 Remarks 1 fl FWD 2 t2 AWD 3 X3 1991 moaels TSB Revision ...

Page 822: ...IRCUIT DIAGRAM VEHICLES WITH AUTO CRUISE CONTROL Up to 1990 models OPEN CONNECTOR c 47 FWD 2 16 t27 AWD F 22 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT LEFT SIDE ml HIGH MOUNTED STOP T X35 AC HOQ35 NM Remarks 1 X l FWD 2 2 AWD F 21 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT RIGHT SIDE 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 823: ...S WITH AUTO CRUISE CONTROL From 1991 models OPEN CONNECTOR c 47 1 8 2 F 22 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT LEFT SIDE 1 1 25 G 1 25 R r I HIGH MOUNTED c3 IA 1 cu I r g5 F 21 m CL Remarks A 2 i D 3 3 i 1991 mocle I s REAR fMh NAT ON RIGHT SIDE TSB Revision I ...

Page 824: ...I I I I I I I ____________ ________ __ __ ___ __ _ 1 I I I I HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT k 1 F 01 gIJj c WITH AIR SPOILOR I F 12 1 HIGH MOUNTED I _____ ___ _ J 3 5 I F 03 1 IC a EMTLID m I RIGHT SIDE 2 q Remarks Vehicles with THEFT ALARM SYSTEM A I NON TURBO Up to 1992 models B TURBO and NON TURBO From 1993 models TSB Revision ...

Page 825: ...k connector located at the right side of the junction block 2 With the ignition switch at the ACC position set the scan tool to the special test setting 3 Check whether the buzzer of the scan tool sounds one time when each of the switches noted below is operated Input signals are being input to the electronic control unit if the buzzer sounds so the operation of that switch can be considered satis...

Page 826: ...amage or disconnec Make the circuit and in Replace the dome light tion of the dome light dividual part check No 4 or repair the wiring har activation circuit P 54 88 ness Malfunction of the elec Replace the electronic tronic control unit control unit When the ignition switch is switched Damage or disconnec If a malfunction is indi Repair the wiring har to the ON position while the dome tion of the...

Page 827: ...e constant supply circuit the other ETACS systems also will voltage circuit and terminal 36 directly connected not function to the battery Electronic control unit terminal voltage status of the electronic control unit connector ECU terminal No Signal Conditions Terminal voltage 36 Electronic control unit At all times Battery positive power supply voltage Checking the ground circuit Disconnect the ...

Page 828: ...e ignition switch at the ON position send HIGH level signals to the electronic control unit to switch OFF the timer circuit and interrupt the dimmed light condition Electronic control unit terminal voltage IDisconnect the electronic control unit connector and check the wiring harness side ECU terminal No Signal Conditions Terminal voltage 3 Ignition switch ON Ignition switch OFF o v ON Battery pos...

Page 829: ...ic control unit terminal voltage status of the electronic control unit connector I ECU terminal No Signal C o n d i t i o n s Terminal voltage 12x Door switch signal Door is opened ov 1 1 2 door switch ON 1 All doors are closed 5v door switch OFF I Checking the door switch circuit Disconnect the electronic control unit connector and check the wiring harness side Terminal Connected Measurement Test...

Page 830: ...ut theft alarm system 2 Vehicles with theft alarm system IOD Ignition Off Draw Description of operation When a door is opened while the dome light switch is at the door interlocked setting the door switch is grounded via the electronic control unit When in that condition the door is then closed the electronic control unit causes grounding and the dimmed light function is activated Electronic contr...

Page 831: ...evel offset dial must coincide with the floor slope for accurate aiming Calibration fixtures are included with the aimers 1 Attach one calibration fixture to each aimer Fixtures will easily snap into position on aimer when properly posi tioned 2 Place aimers at center line of each wheel on one side of vehicle Unit A must be placed at rear wheel with target facing forward Unit B must be placed at f...

Page 832: ...its if beyond these limits Horizontal dial pointer reading on each aimer 1 left to 1 right MOUNTING AIMERS 1 Remove the calibration fixture from each unit 2 As shown in the figure install the articulating vacuum cup assembly A vacuum extension plate B and small universal adaptor C to each unit 3 Make the length of the adjustable rod as shown in the figure 4 Position aimers on headlights by pushing...

Page 833: ...o center line of headlight 3 Position a vertical tape on the screen with reference to the center line of each of headlights VISUAL HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT 1 A properly aimed lower beam will appear on the aiming screen 7 6 m 25 feet in front of the vehicle The shaded area as shown in the illustration indicates high intensity zone 2 Adjust low beam of headlights to match the low beam pattern of the rig...

Page 834: ...Disconnect the front combination light setting spring in the engine compartment 2 Pull forward and remove the front combination light 16A0204 r SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION OF FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT 1 Align the projection part of the front combination light with the hole and then install by pushing toward the rear 2 Pull the setting spring into the engine compartment twist it 90 ...

Page 835: ...B Revision 1 Caution 1 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand dirty glove etc 2 If the glass surface is dirty be sure to clean it with alcohol paint thinner etc and install it after drying it thoroughly Be sure to attach the socket cover NOTE Be sure to install the socket cover securely because if it is not an insecure installation could cause such problems as clouding of the lens or i...

Page 836: ...e fog light assembly and then remove the cap 2 Remove the bulb installation spring and pull out the bulb Caution 1 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand dirty glove etc 2 If the glass surface is dirty be sure to clean it with alcohol paint thinner etc and install it after drying it thoroughly Be sure to attach the socket cover NOTE Be sure to install the socket cover securely because ...

Page 837: ...pulling the rear combina tion light toward you in order to remove it Caution Take particular care when prying the rear combina tion light because excessive force or careless prying might cause scarring of the rear combination light or of the body surface SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION OF REAR COMBlNATlON LIGHT 1 Remove any remaining adhesive material from the body surface and the re...

Page 838: ...nd Non turbo Vehicles with air spoiler From 1993 models l Removal steps 1 Air spoiler Refer to GROUP 51 Aero Parts 2 High mounted stop light 16FO169 J TSB Revision SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 2 HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT Turbo and Non turbo Vehicles with air spoiler From 1993 models To remove the high mounted stop light first remove the air spoiler center stay installation screws ...

Page 839: ...No continuity Power is not supplied 2 4 terminals Continuity TAILLIGHT RELAY 1 Take out the taillight relay from the engine compartment relay box 2 Connect battery to terminal 2 and check continuity be tween terminals with terminal 4 grounded Power is supplied 1 3 terminals Continuity I 3 terminals No continuity Power is not supplied 2 4 terminals Continuity FOG LIGHT RELAY 1 Take out the fog ligh...

Page 840: ...HEFT ALARM HEADLIGHT RELAY 1 Remove theft alarm headlight relay 2 Connect battery to terminal 2 and check continuity be tween terminals with terminal 5 grounded Power is supplied Power is not supplied 3 6 terminals 3 6 terminals 1 3 terminals 2 5 terminals Continuity No continuity Continuity Removal steps I Heater control panel assembly Referto P 54 108 2 Hazard switch TSB Revision ...

Page 841: ...erminals FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION M64lYAA Operate the switch to check for continuity between terminals Terminal 1 1 1 1 1 Switch P o s i t i o n I I NOTE o o indicates that there is continuity between the terminals RHEOSTAT INSPECTION MYlRAK 1 Connect the battery and a test bulb 4OW as shown in the figure 2 The function of the rheostat is normal if the intensity of illumination changes smoothly...

Page 842: ...tch Operation mode Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Vehicles with ETACS Intermittent interval set Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Auto cruise control switch Rated load A SET RESUME V o l t a g e d r o p V Horn switch Rated load A Specifications 0 22 iI 0 05 0 2 or less 6 6 _t 0 5 0 2 or less 10 7 f 0 8 9 8 t 0 7 0 2 or less 4 Max 4 Fixed timing intermittent wipers Adjustable timing intermittent wipers Vehicle speed sens...

Page 843: ...ring wheel Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Pankl 390 models1 3 l Knee protector From 1 I Refer to GROUP 52 Instrument Pbel 1 4 Lower column cover 5 Upper column cover 6 Column switch P 16Al274 3 1 19A9492 13A0219 13A022 I 2 SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 1 REMOVAL OF HORN PAD The horn pad can be removed by pressing upward 2 REMOVAL OF STEERING WHEEL Use a steering wheel puller to remove the steering wheel...

Page 844: ...that there is continuity between the terminals TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Operate the switch and check the continuity between the terminals 14 15 16 Left 0 0 Neutral Right 0 0 NOTE o o indicates that there is continuity between the terminals DIMMER PASSING SWITCH Operate the switch and check the continuity between the terminals iiiz cy 1 I 21 25 26 Dimmer switch High Low 0 0 0 0 1 Passing switch I 0 I NOT...

Page 845: ...ffective sounding voltage Power consumption Horn Theft alarm horn Sound level Horn low sound High sound Theft alarm horn Fundamental frequency Horn low sound High sound Theft alarm horn Specifications Flat type v 1 1 5 1 5 A 3 0 3 5 dB 100 l 12 100 I 12 105 115 HZ 370 415 430 TSB Revision ...

Page 846: ...to the ACC or 1 One of the horns does not sound the ON position battery voltage is constantly l Check the horn applied to the horn 2 Horns do not sound l When the horn switch is switched ON electric l Check the horn switch ity flows to multi purpose fuse the horn the l Check the multi purpsoe fuse horn switch and ground l In this condition electricity flows to multi purpose fuse the horn the horn ...

Page 847: ...nd 4 Theft alarm horn 5 Theft alarm horn bracket 16A1269 RELAY INSPECTION THEFT ALARM HORN RELAY 1 Take out the theft alarm horn relay from theft alarm horn bracket 2 Connect battery to terminal 2 and check continuity be tween terminals with terminal 4 grounded Power is supplied l 3 terminals Continuity I Power is not supplied 111 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 848: ...ax input W Reset time second Thermal fuse fusion temperature C F TROUBLESHOOTING CIGARETTE LIGHTER CIRCUIT Specifications 120 Within 18 180 250 356 482 M54MB A MWMHCB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Up to 1990 models ASHTRAY ILLUMINATIOA LIGHT Ia E ION NLALy I GHT l 5 g8 f 7 J C TAIL L A CIGARETTE I LIGHTER RHEOSTAT E 01 TSB Revision I ...

Page 849: ...bleshooting 54 I oi From 1 991 models IGNITION SWITH ACC ASHTRAY ILLUMINATIOh LIGHT c 43 4 B 6 J B 15A I L ______ k 13 fa C 32 6 w J J C AIL 4 1 RHEOSTAT I E 01 Remarks tl UD to 1992 models t2CFrom 1993 mode IS TSB Revision ...

Page 850: ...ther material on the element l Using an ohmmeter check the continuity of the element CAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE CIGARETTE LIGHTER SOCKET AS AUXILIARY POWER SOURCE 1 When using a plug in tYpe of accessory do not use anything with a load of more than 120W 2 It is recommended that only the lighter be inserted in the receptacle Use of plug in type accesories may damage the receptacle and result in poor r...

Page 851: ...seconds day TROUBLESHOOTING CLOCK CIRCUIT Specification Crystal oscillator Fluorescent digital display 2 at 20 C 68 F l M XMB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1989 models IGNITION SWITCH ACC 4 c 43 J B 0 G 10A 10A 4 3 P CLOCK J C Eg TAIL z 6 5 10 10 1 IBLE 3 1 TAILLIGHT RELAY q 1 C 36 a 1 ____ 11 8 C 32 5 C 32 m cl 1 KXJI AC H1406 N TSB Revision ...

Page 852: ...shooting CLOCK CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM KX 1990 models lGNIl SWITC rI H ON SUB FU IBLE ACC LINK 1 8 TAILLI J B I t _____________ __ I C 32 4 11 14 1 6 CLOCK E 04 10 10 GHT A 12 l C 23 10 C 16 5 35 AC li1425 WI TSB Revision ...

Page 853: ...ORAGE CONNECTOR li35l f234 A 07 2X 2 IdEd 123 C 37 1 J B r C 32 CLOCK E 04 r DN SUB FU d IBLE ACC LINK 1 2 d 2 3 c 43 I 0 10A 5 ____ __ _ _ ____ I1 10 3 u 2 J C TAIL z 1 6 I 10 10 I RELAY 6 c 37 1 8 I 5 1 3 m GROUND J C m 16 C 32 J 8 4 C 38 m m CL KXSS AC tll44SNN TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 854: ...tor antenna ring nut Pole antenna mast TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIO SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles without CD player 1989 models Nm 1 5 2 5 5 6 ft lbs 1 1 1 8 3 7 4 3 M54NHAQb f Rqq C 61 r L 13 XJE kFUl ISLE 8 IGNITION IGNITION SWITCH ACC SWITCH Gl l l MOTOR ANTENNA RELAY RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER 35 AC Hl422 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 855: ...EM Troubleshooting 54 113 J J C GROUND r i RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER LEFT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE DOOR SPEAKER FRONT SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER 3 RHEOSTAT E 01 TSB Revision I ...

Page 856: ...AILLIGHT RELAY F KXS5 AC H1423 NY t i I 3 SUE IN 1 El C 36 c IC 3 c 39 MOTOR ANTENNA RELAY 3 2 1 1 54 114 AUDIO SYSTEM Troubleshooting iFi UP ON IGNITION ACC SWITCH IGI l _ ___ 7 7 c 43 g J B 10Al 0 3 C 4 s m _____ _ 2 C 5 f OWN RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER I 1 TSB Revision 1 ...

Page 857: ...AUDIO SYSTEM Troubleshooting 54 115 J B RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER LEFT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE I DOOR SPEAKER FRONT SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER TSB Revision ...

Page 858: ...1 and 1992 models h I GHT J FE I BLE IGNITION SW ITCH ACC r b OA 1OA ___ ___ _______ _ 1 IOD OR g 4 OR z c g Rlq C 61 r KX35 AC Ii1441 WY 3 1 2 9 c 37 1 5 2 4 ___ ___ 7 izB 123 c 0 IOA I I I t I II O 3 c 39 3 L J 10 C 42 3 c 4 2 E 2 s MOTOR A NNA r r w f ii m I RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER TSB Revision ...

Page 859: ...C RHEO ii3 77 0 1RHEOSTAT E 01 7 g 2 1 FRONT SPEAKER m CGROJ m ly i m cl A 1 C 32 6 r 1 L C 38 4 P El 3 i X1 Vehicles without theft alarm SYStem X2 Vehlcles with theft alarm SYStem v 3 9 i RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER I i RIGHT SIDE LEFT 6lDE RIGHT SIDE J DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER I TSB Revision ...

Page 860: ... AUDIO SYSTEM Troubleshooting Vehicles without CD player From 1993 models 0 IOA IGNITION IGNITION SWITCHtACC sWITCH IG1 I 2 c 37 1 2 44 Bp J lee4 ____ _ _ T 7C 3 11DA 7 c 43 J B 1 I 3 c 39 10 C 42 RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER 1 TSB Revision I ...

Page 861: ...E J C GROUND 2 m Opl 14 m cl RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER C 62 1 P t f El atr LEFT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE J DOOR SPEAKER FRONT SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER J C RHEO RHEOSTAT E 01 m C 32 6 1 C 36 TSB Revision ...

Page 862: ...oting AUDIO SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with CD player 1991 models fY IGHT iUB IN L j u C 1 g 3 IOA blOA 1 zfgq C 61 r _ i6 Ifi 1 I I I I I I MOTOR KEN A F 26 I I I I I I i RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER I IX35AC Hl444 XX TSB Revision I ...

Page 863: ...___ y y y I POWER AMPLIFIER 1 F 25 2 L E F T S I D E L E F T SIDE R I G H T S I D E RIGHT SIDEI L E F T SIDE R I G H T S I D E I DOOR GPEAKER FRONT SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER C 32 J B I P Eli 31 m CL d n Xl Vehicles without theft alarm system X2 Vehlcles with theft alarm system 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 864: ...g AUDIO SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Vehicles with CD player 1992 models TAILLIGHT RELAY L C c C f 13 L 1 c 37 c I 7 c 43 1 J B I E3 J C 4 p JJq r I fzlimq C 61 r 3 c 39 3 L A 70 c 42 z z1 5 a f J MOTOR K RADIO WITH TAPE PLAYER 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 865: ... J B Xl Vehicles w i t h o u t theft 8larm sY3tem X2 VehlcleS wlth t h e f t a l a r m 3YStem OPERATION l When the radio power switch is turned on with the ignition switch at ACC or ON current flows through fuse No 3 radio and ground causing the radio to operate l For an electronically tuned radio battery voltage is always supplied for use of the memory and other functions in the radio 1 TSB Revis...

Page 866: ...M or no sound from FM B 4 5 Insufficient sensitivity B 5 6 Distortion on AM or on both AM and FM B 6 7 Distortion on FM only B 7 8 Too few automatic select stations B 8 9 Insufficient memory preset stations are erased B 9 1 Cassette tape will not insert C l 2 No sound c 2 3 No sound from one speaker c 3 4 Sound quality is poor or sound is weak c 4 5 Cassette tape will not eject c 5 6 Uneven revolu...

Page 867: ...tion with a strong signal to boost resistance to interference 2 Suppress high tones to reduce noise 3 Extend antenna completely I N o I Inspect the vehicle s noise suppressor Yes OK No c If due to vehicle noise It may not be possible to prevent noise if the signal is weak If due to external noise In almost all cases prevention on the receiver side is impossible Weak signals especially are suscepti...

Page 868: ...for stereo reception and 30 40 km 19 25 miles for monaural reception 2 The signal becomes weak when an area of shadow from the transmitting antenna places where there are obstructions such as mountains or buildings between the antenna and the car and noise will appear This is called first fading and gives a steady buzzing noise 3 If a direct signal hits the antenna at the same time as a signal ref...

Page 869: ...nals close in frequency interfere with each other creating a repetitious high pitched sound This sound is generated not only by sound signals but by electrical waves as well 2 Factors due to vehicle noise Alternator noise may be a cause Does the noise occur even when the lights are turned off Is the antenna plug properly connected to the radio Correctly connect the antenna Yes Clean the feeder wir...

Page 870: ... sound quality to suppress high tones inspect the vehicle s noise suppressor re fer to A 6 No Is the radio chassis ground mounted securely Securely tighten the nuts for the chassis ground 1Yes Is the antenna plug properly connected to the radio I No b Correctly attach the antenna c Is the antenna body in Clean the feeder wire and ground wire motor antenna refer to D 1 2 mounting area Mount the ant...

Page 871: ...of electrical noise Yes r l Continue to check for static when static is detected check for the conditions listed above Noise prevention on the radio side is difficult If the problem is particularly worse than other 1No radios consult a service center If the problem is particularly worse than other radios consult a service center 2 There is much noise only on FM Due to differences in FM and AM syst...

Page 872: ...c response to one area are common due to several body parts being imperfectly grounded Caution 1 Connecting a high tension cable to the noise filter may destroy the noise filter and should never be done 2 Check that there is no external noise Since failure due this may result in misdiagnosis due to inability to identify the noise source this operation must be performed 3 Noise prevention should be...

Page 873: ...AUDIO SYSTEM Troubleshooting NOISE SUPPRESSOR LOCATION 54 131 SOHC DOHC Models equipped with the AM FM radio AWD 1 Noise condenser TSB Revision ...

Page 874: ... tires etc occurs because of separation from the ground causing a buzzing noise Since no mea sures can be taken on the radio side steps should be taken to discharge the static electricity of the vehicle body Is the radio correctly grounded Is the mounting screw tightened securely No Tighten the screw securely 1 Yes 4 Is the antenna correctly grounded If noise appears when the antenna is moved this...

Page 875: ... body Is the radio chassis correctly grounded Is the mounting screw tightened securely No Tighten the screw securely IYes Is the antenna correctly grounded If noise appears when the antenna is moved this means the ground is not securely connected If rust is present of the antenna ground screw clean and tighten the ground securely IYes f 1 Repair or replace radio 1 L I About multipath noise and fad...

Page 876: ...ntact a servrce l Time period center B RADIO B l 1 No sound I Is the key switch of the vehicle in the correct position ACC or ON No Perform the correct operation I I Yes f Is the radio switched ON IYes Perform the correct operation I Yes With electronic volume control press a few seconds in the up direction to check t Is there sound when a cassette tape is inserted Yes Repair or replace radio SF r...

Page 877: ...aker for conductance Yes Repair speaker harness and ensure proper connection of relay connec tors No I Reparr or replace speaker 2P connector Crackle crackle R range A0665 Crackle crackle Tester Q range xl Conductance check method 1 1 Remove 9P and 5P connectors from radio 2 Insert test Drobe into connector terminal Concerning speaker connector refer to P 54 113 115 117 119 121 and 123 Determinati...

Page 878: ...1 Yes I Is proper performance obtained when the vehicle is moved I No 11 Is the antenna completely extended No Refer to troubleshooting E l Yes No Are the antenna plug and radio unit properly connected I Reconnect Yes t Does the problem disappear if connected to another radio I Repair or replace radio No TSB Revision 1 Antenna malfunction For motor antenna refer to E l 2 B 4 1 No sound from AM or ...

Page 879: ...roubleshooting E l I Yes t Does tuning solve the problem Is the problem limited to the reception of a specific radio station from a specific position Electrical field condition related multipath noise or fading noise No Is the antenna plug properly connected to the unit Ensure proper connection Does the problem disappear when a different radio is Repair or replace radio I I Antenna malfunction For...

Page 880: ...nstant No 4 4 Are the speaker cords in contact with the cone paper I Yes ä Remove cords away from cone paper t Remove the speakers and check for torn cone paper or foreign objects Yes Repair or replace speakers I No Check for deformation with speaker Installed No Yes Install speaker securely I Repair or replace radio 1 B 7 1 Distortion on FM only I Yes Due to multipath noise No TSB Revision ...

Page 881: ...le in an underground garage or inside a building No Yes Is proper performance obtained when the vehicle is moved Yes OK I I I Is the antenna completely extended I Refer to troubleshooting E 1 1 Yes Is the antenna plug properly connected to the equipment Ensure proper connection For motor antenna refer to E l 2 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 882: ...Repair or replace radio C CASSEl fE PLAYER 1 C l 1 Cassette tape will not insert Are there any foreign objects in the cassette player Remove the object s I Attempting to force a foreign object e g a coin or clip etc out of No the cassette player may damage the mechanism The player should be taken to a service dealer for repair Does the cassette player work if another tape is inserted Replace tape ...

Page 883: ...B 1 vehicle fuses C 3 1 No sound from one speaker Is there any sound when the bal ance or fader buttons are cen tered OK No Does the radio produce any sound When sound comes from only left or rrght channel of the deck No Change the tape and check for sound Wpi j A prerecorded tape should be used on both channels N O l Ensure that the tape label IS not loose that the tape itself IS not deformed and...

Page 884: ...Cassette tape will not eject I The problems covered here are all the result of the also possible and attempting to force the tape out use of a bad tape deformed or not properly of the player can cause damage to the mechanism tightened or of a malfunction of the cassette player The player should be taken to a service dealer for itself Malfunctions involving the tape becoming repair caught in the me...

Page 885: ...pe is changed o Ensure that the tape label is not loose that the tape No itself is not deformed and that the tape is tightly wound l Tapes of C l 20 or greater length often get caught in the mechanism and should not be used Does the problem only occur while the vehicle is being driven Repair or replace cassette player Is the cassette player properly installed to the vehicle Ensure cassette player ...

Page 886: ...e properly if CD is properly inserted the CD dirtv or if CD is replaced with No Reparr or replace CD player Yes Is proper CD also rejecte though it is inserted once again If the CD is already loaded doesn t the shutter open to allow rnsertron when another CD is inserted If the key switch is not at ACC or ON the CD stops at depth of 15 mm below the nanel surface even when it is inserted and it will...

Page 887: ...roperly No Are the radro set and CD player connected securely7 Yes 1 Repair or replace CD player The combined radio cassette must operate properly D 3 CD sound skips 1 Sound sometrmes skips durrng parking Yes Is CD face scratched or dirty Repair or replace CD player I I Replace CD 2 Sound sometrmes skips during driving Stop vehicle and check it Check it by using a proper CD which is free of scratc...

Page 888: ...ted Is the key switch ignition key1 at ACC or ON Yes If CD IS not elected don t reject It The player may be damaged Therefore contact a service shop for repairs 1 D 6 1 No sound from one soeaker Securely connect them Yes 1 Does it play properly If another CD Yes Repair or replace B CD player Repair or replace the combined radio set 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 889: ...Repair the harness E 2 1 Motor antenna extends and retracts but does not receive Is the antenna itself OK No Repair or replace it I Yes Is operation normal when a new antenna assem bly is directly installed to the radio Refer to B Radio troubleshooting 1 Mast A Mast B Mast C connector Fender Antenna housing F Body ground E 16AO667 I Checking the antenna I Ohmmeter measurement locations Result I I ...

Page 890: ...ght correct as shown 5 Turn the rack cable gears toward the rear of the vehicle 90 to the right and engage the cable with the motor gears NOTE Pull the rack cable up gently The rack cable gears are not engaged with the motor gears if the cable comes out smoothly If the gears are not engaged check the cable tip again to be sure it IS straight then repeat 4 and 5 6 Raise the antenna pole vertically ...

Page 891: ...teps 1 Radio panel 2 Radio and tape player mounting screw 3 Radio with tape player 4 Radio bracket RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER I991 models REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 16A1275 Removal steps 1 Radio panel 2 Radio and tape player mounting screw 3 Radio with tape player 4 Radio with tape player and CD player 5 Radio bracket TSB Revision I ...

Page 892: ...steps 1 Radio panel 2 Radio and tape player mounting screw 3 Radio with tape player 4 Radio with tape player and CD player 5 Radro bracket RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER I993 models IEMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1 Radio panel 2 Radio and tape player mounting screw 3 Radio with tape player 4 Radio bracket TSB Revision ...

Page 893: ...4 151 POWER AMPLIFIER I991 models Vehicles with CD player Mm REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal steps 1 Trunk room side trim Referto GROUP 52 Trim 2 Power amplifier 3 Bracket SPEAKER Front speaker REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION M64NMAH TSB Revision ...

Page 894: ...teps 1 Door trim Refer to GROUP 52 Trim 2 Speaker garnish 3 Door speaker 4 Speaker cover Removal steps I 1 Speaker garnish 2 Rear weaker SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 1 REMOVAL OF SPEAKER GARNISH Remove from the luggage compartment side the garnish installation nut 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 895: ...onnection 4 Feeder wire connection 5 Motor antenna assembly INSPECTION Vehicles built up to June 1988 MOTOR ANTENNA ASSEMBLY Following inspections should be made with the harness connector disconnected from the power antenna relay 1 With the power connected to the terminal 10 and the power to the terminal 7 check that the antenna mast extends With the connection reversed check that the antenna mas...

Page 896: ...With the power connected to the terminal IO and the I 1 power to the terminal 7 check that the antenna mast extends With the connection reversed check that the antenna mast retracts ANTENNA RELAY With the harness connector connected and the antenna mast extending retracting check the antenna relay voltage Measurement terminals Measurement Voltage VI conditions Between 1 and 6 Between 2 and 6 Betwe...

Page 897: ...INSTALLATION Removal steps IPre removal and Post installation ODeration 1 Feeder cable and radio connections 2 Trunk room side trim 3 Motor antenna or whip antenna and okemoval and Installation of Front Seat feeder cable connections 4 Feeder cable TSB Revision ...

Page 898: ...ting REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER TROUBLESHOOTING DEFOGGER CIRCUIT I GN SWI jlBLE IG L 7 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SUB FUF 1989 models LINK fl I 6 r Q C 23 4 1 z KX35 AC HY32 NY M54PHBDb LR I LR I J B GENERATOR c 16 L TERMINAL A 3 DEFOGGER SWITCH TSB Revision ...

Page 899: ...REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Troubleshootina 54 157 TAILLIGHT RELAY J J B RHEOSTAT E 01 i m J C TAIL C 16 ILL IN0 I 1 6 iii m EgJ C ff RHEO 3 LL DEFOGGER E 15 SWITCH 1 2 m 3456 TSB Revision ...

Page 900: ...W DEFOGGER Troubleshooting DEFOGGER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1990 models SUB LINK c L c 1 4 1 7 n CLI DEFOGGER m 4 1 J B LR 14 LR 1 DEFOGGER SWITCH 1 OFF OA f2 Ii5 L 3 J E 15 DEFOGGER TOR MINAL 25AC H1322 NY TSB Revision ...

Page 901: ...REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Troubleshooting 54 I 59 TAILLIGHT RELAY z I 2 s lZ iCATED 30A 5 RHEOSTAT E 01 p rg J C TAIL 4 ILL f 1 zi DEFOGGER TIMER zi I 1 C 16 DEFOGGER SWITCH TSB Revision ...

Page 902: ...DOW DEFOGGER Troubleshooting DEFOGGER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM rriX33 AC H1332 NM From 1991 models SUE LIh I FU IK 4 4 IGNITION WH ml J B DEFOGGER SWITCH A N DEFOGGER a _ m r h Z c 75x 121 m 4 5 6 OR IINAL TSB Revision ...

Page 903: ...REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Troubleshootins 54 161 TAILLIGHT RELAY z I iz c p E CATED IOA z I C 32 8 5 RHEOSTAT E 01 J C TAIL C 32 16 C 38 4 i Pp N J B 1 C 16 DEFOGGER SWITCH 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 904: ...nt I I 0 1 1 I Powve Prlnted heater line Negative terminal terminal 16Y332 Break Tape q Conductive paint 16Y333 THE PRINTED HEATER LINES CHECK 1 Run engine at 2 000 rpm Check heater element with battery at full 2 Turn ON rear window defogger switch Measure heater element voltage with circuit tester at rear window glass center A Condition good if indicating about 6V 3 If 12 V is indicated at A ther...

Page 905: ...uity between the terminals OFF Terminal 3 NOTE O O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals DEFOGGER RELAY INSPECTION M54PlAa 1 Remove defogger relay 2 Connect battery power source to terminal 3 Check circuit between term Is with terminal 1 grounded Continuity Power is 4 5 terminals I not supplied No continuity 1 3 terminals Continuity 1 TSB Revision ...

Page 906: ...d the test light to the timer as shown in the figure 3 Check to be sure that the test lamp illuminates for approximately eleven seconds when battery voltage is applied to terminal I for a few seconds 4 Check to be sure that the test light switches OFF when battery voltage is again applied during the test described above to terminal 0 I 1 Battery TSB Revision ...

Page 907: ...whether or not input signals are being input from each switch to the electronic control unit 1 Connect the scan tool to the data link connector located at the right side of the junction block 2 Check to be sure that voltage should be output with the ignition key OFF door switch ON door opening and the following switch ON l Key reminder switch l Hood switch l Door switch l Door lock actuator switch...

Page 908: ...isconnected Check by following in Replace the fuse No 9 lowed but the SECURITY light wiring of SECURITY light dividual part and circuit or repair the harness doesn t illuminate power supply or drive cir check No 9 proce There is an alarm however cuit dures P 54 176 Nhen an alarm test is conducted after about 20 seconds have Damaged or disconnected Replace the light bulb sassed vvi b g of SECURITY ...

Page 909: ...N in the usual way ry using the lighting switch Probable cause Check method switch the circuit check No 4 P 54 172 Malfunction of the electro nit control unit Damaged or disconnected wiring of trunk lid switch If a malfunction is indi cated as a result of checking the input sig nals check by follow switch ing individual part and the circuit check No 8 procedures P 54 176 Malfunction of the ECU I D...

Page 910: ...is der switch the circuit check No 7 procedures P 54 175 Malfunction of the ECU Replace the ECU NOTE 1 If there is abnormally excessive play in the installation of the key cylinder switch of the trunk and for doors or if there is improper installation or if there is a malfunction of the switch itself the signals to disarm the system and to deactivate the alarm won t be sent to the ECU In this inst...

Page 911: ...al I which is directly connected to the battery ECU terminal voltage Connection condition of the ECU connector ECU Signal Condition Terminal terminal No voltage ECU power supply At all times Batterypositivevoltage Checking the ground circuit Disconnect the connector and check at the wiring harness side ECU termwa No Connected lo measured component Measurement Tester connectton Check condition Stan...

Page 912: ...s are sent to the ECU ECU terminal voltage Connection condition of the ECU connector I ECU Signal Condition Terminal terminal No voltage I I I Key reminder Key removed Battery positive voltage switch Key inserted ov Checking the key reminder switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU and check at the wiring harness side ECU terminal No Connected to measured component Measurement Tester con...

Page 913: ...nals are sent to the ECU When the hood is opened the hood switch is switched ON LOW level signals are sent to the ECU ECU terminal voltage Connection condition of the ECU connector Measurement is not possible by using a voltmeter but IS posstble by using an oscilloscope Checking the hood switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU and check at the wiring harness side Checking individual par...

Page 914: ...is opened the door switch is switched ON LOW level signals are sent to the ECU ECU terminal voltage Connection condition of the ECU I ECU terminal No Signal I Condition Terminal voltage I Measurement is not possible by using a voltmeter but is possible by using an oscilloscope Checking the door switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU and check at the wiring harness side Checking individ...

Page 915: ...witch is switched ON LOW level signals are sent to the ECU ECU terminal voltage Connection condition of the ECU I ECU terminal No Signal I Condition I Terminal voltage I I I I I I I Measurement is not possible by using a voltmeter but is possible by using an oscilloscope Checking the door switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU and check at the wiring harness side Checking individual pa...

Page 916: ... No Signal I Condition Terminal voltage Q 0 c a rk Door lock Lock OFF 5V 03 switch actuator _ rear door switch Unlock ON ov Measurement is not possible by using a voltmeter but is possible by using an oscilloscope Checking the door switch circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU and check at the wiring harness side Door lock Door lock actuator Resistance ground actuator sw tch switch IOD Igniti...

Page 917: ...e 5v 0 switch cylinder front LH Rotate ov Trunk lid key Trunk lid Lock 5v 0 cylinder key unlock switch cylinder Unlock ov Checking the door key cylinder and trunk lid key cylinder unlock switch circuit ECU Connected terminal to measured Measurement Tester Check Standard No component connection condillon Door key Not No cylinder Resfstance g r o u n d Dc s rotafe continuity switch Rotate Continuity...

Page 918: ...andard No component No 0 Trunk lid Closed continuity switch Resistance ground Trunk lid 1 Open Contlnulty I SECURITY LIGHT ACTIVATION CIRCUIT I lgnltion switch IGl Description of operation If all doors are in locked state after key locking or key less locking the ECU transistor is turned ON and the security light comes on Checking the security light activation circuit Disconnect the Step 1 1 3 L L...

Page 919: ... ECU transistor is turned ON if the vehicle door etc are opened without use of the key This energizes the theft alarm horn relay to activate the theft alarm horn Checking the theft alarm horn activation circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU then short circuit terminal No 2 YL line and activate the theft alarm horn relay Step Check object Judgement Mal Normal function Cause Remedy 1 Theft ala...

Page 920: ...t the headlight relay Check object Judgement Normal Mal function Cause Remedy Wiring harness slde terminal voltage l3 Ground1 Battery positive voltage ov Sub fusible link 0 blown Damaged or discon netted harness Replace the sub fusible link Repair the harness Checking individual part Headlight relay Refer to P 54 97 4 i ETACS control unit Headlight ETACS control unit electronic electronic control ...

Page 921: ...nect the connector of the ECU then short circuit terminal No 2 YL line and activate the headlight relay 1 Judaement 1 Step 1 Check object Cause Headlight relay ter minal voltage 1 Ground 2 Headlight terminal Battery ov Harness damaged or Repair the voltage positive disconnected harness Z Ground voltage 3 Headlight terminal Banery The Malfunction of the Replace the voltage positrve head 1 Ground he...

Page 922: ...lay activation circuit Disconnect the connector of the ECU depress fully the clutch pedal and activate the starter relay 5 f ETACS control unit electronic Judgement Step Check object Cause 1 Starter relay terminal Battery ov Malfunction of fhe Check the voltage positive starter relay starter relay 3 Ground voltage 2 Starter motor Battery OV Harness damaged or Repair the terminal positive disconnec...

Page 923: ...aintenance 00 45 I Torsion Active ECS 338 l 19 l Torsion FWD 34 15 I AXLE HUB Rear FWD Rear Disc Brakes 27 8 l Rear FWD Rear Drum Brakes 27 6 l AXLE SHAFT AWD 27 17 1 B BACKLASH Total Rear Axle Check AWD 27 15 l BALL JOINT Rotation Starting Torque Check 378 8 I Tie Rod End Starting Torque Check 37A 15 l Tie Rod End Variation Check 37A 15 l BALL JOINT SEALS Maintenance 00 45 I BAR Stabilizer Active...

Page 924: ... vehicle Inspection DOHC Ignition On vehicle Inspection SOHC 8VALVE Ignition On vehicle Inspection SOHC lGVALVE COLUMNSWITCH _ _ _ __ _ C O M B I N A T I O N L I G H T R e a r COMPRESSION PRESSURE Check DOHC _ _ _ _ _ 21 13 l 13 302 I 13 96 l 13 186 l 54 l 00 11 54 95 11 Check SOHC 11 8 l COMPRESSOR 55 38 l COMPRESSOR Air 33B 125 l COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT Adjustment 55 17 l COMPRESSOR NOISE Adjustme...

Page 925: ...27 l EGR VALVE CONTROL VACUUM 17 26 l ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT ABS 35 134 I ELEMENT Air Cleaner Inspection and Replacement 15 6 I Air Cleaner Maintenance 00 39 I END PLAY Hub Inspection Active ECS 338 86 I Hub Inspection Front Axle 26 5 l Rear Wheel Bearing Adjustment FWD 27 3 l Rear Wheel Bearing Check AWD 27 15 l ENGINE DOHC 11 63 l SOHC 11 14 I ENGINE CONTROL 13 328 I ENGINE CONTROL MODULE POWER...

Page 926: ...n v e h i c l e I n s p e c t i o n D O H C O n v e h i c l e I n s p e c t i o n SOHC 8VALVE O n v e h i c l e Inspectron SOHC lGVALVE FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID Turbo O n v e h i c l e I n s p e c t i o n D O H C FUEL PUMP On vehicle Inspection DOHC On vehicle Inspection SOHC 8VALVE O n v e h i c l e i n s p e c t i o n SOHC lGVALVE FUEL SYSTEM Maintenance FUEL TANK DOHC AWD D O H C F W D SOHC 8VALV...

Page 927: ... t3 302 l 13 96 l 13 l 86 l 13 302 I 13 96 l 13 l 86 l 54 6 11 13 284 l 13 78 l 13 77 l 13 172 I 13 171 I 16 32 11 16 40 11 16 39 H INDICATOR _ 33B 140 l INDIVIDUAL PARTS Auto cruise Control Inspection 13 401 I INFLATION PRESSURE Tire Check 31 4 I INJECTORS On vehicle Inspection DOHC 13 295 l O n v e h i c l e I n s p e c t i o n SOHC 8VALVE 13 90 l O n v e h i c l e I n s p e c t i o n SOHC lGVAL...

Page 928: ...ck AWD Transaxle Inspection AWD Transaxle Inspection FWD Transfer Inspection OIL LINE Rear OIL PAN DOHC SOHC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Check OIL PUMP Power Steering Power Steering Pressure Test Rear Rear Discharge Flow Volume Check OIL SCREEN DOHC SOHC OIL SEALS Camshaft DOHC Camshaft SOHC Drive Shaft Replacement A T Drive Shaft Replacement AWD Drive Shaft Replacement FWD Transfer Replace...

Page 929: ... Inspectron DOHC 13 258 l Fuel On vehicle Inspection SOHC WALVE 13 46 l F u e l O n v e h i c l e I n s p e c t i o n SOHC lGVALVE 13 147 l Oil Rear 378 15 I Water DOHC 14 20 I Water SOHC 14 15 I PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM Inspection Non Turbo 17 17 l Inspection Turbo 17 18 l PURGE CONTROL VALVE Turbo 17 20 I PURGE PORT VACUUM 17 19 l Q QUARTER WINDOW GLASS 42 70 I R RADIATOR 14 9 l RADIATOR CAP Pressur...

Page 930: ...nt Temperature Cooling Engine Coolant Temperature Emission Control Engine Coolant Temperature On vehicle Inspection DOHC ___ _ ___ __ _ Engine Coolant Temperature On vehicle Inspection SOHC 8VALVE 14 31 l 17 21 l 13 268 t 13 55 l Engine Coolant Temperature On vehicle Inspection S O H C l GVALVE 13 l 55 t G AWD ABS 35 132 l Heated Oxygen On vehicle Inspection DOHC 13 290 l Height 338 135 I IAC Valv...

Page 931: ...C lGVALVE 13 136 l Closed Throttle Position On vehicle Inspection D O H C 13 274 I Closed Throttle Position On vehicle Inspection SOHC 8VALVE 13 61 l Closed Throttle Position On vehicle Inspection SOHC lGVALVE 13 160 I Column E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e C o o l i n g Engine Coolant Temperature Heater A i r C o n d i t i o n i n g a n d v e n t i l a t i o n F o g L i g h t _ Ha...

Page 932: ...l 32 5 l 22 18 l 22 4 l 23 100 I 22 17 I 22 4 l 23 108 I 10 ALPHABETICAL INDEX M T AWD 22 23 l TRANSFER OIL Replacement 23 82 l TRANSFER OIL Level Inspection 23 82 l TRANSFER OIL SEAL Replacement AWD 22 19 l TRANSISTOR Ignition Power On vehicle Inspection DOHC 13 302 I TRIM Door Front 42 76 i Door Rear 42 78 l Interior 52 33 l TRUNK LID 42 57 l TRUNK LID Adjustment 42 50 I TRUNK LID TORSION BAR Ad...

Page 933: ... l Rear Door Drip Line 42 l 14 l WHEEL 31 5 l WHEEL Runout Check 31 4 l Steering 37A 25 l WHEEL ALIGNMENT Front Adjustment Active ECS 338 86 I Front Adjustment Front Suspension 33A 5 l Rear Inspection AWD 34 23 l Rear Inspection FWD 34 5 l WHEEL BEARING Adjustment Active ECS 33B 87 l Adjustment Front Suspension 33A 5 l End Play Adjustment FWD 27 3 l WHEEL CYLINDER Rear Brake 35 11 l l Rear Mainten...

Page 934: ...NOTES ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for GALANT 1989

Reviews:

Related manuals for GALANT 1989

Brands by name

Popular brands

Mitsubishi MOTORS GALANT 1989, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for GALANT 1989

Reviews:

Related manuals for GALANT 1989

Brands by name

Popular brands